HomeMy WebLinkAbout2858 CARLSBAD BLVD; ; FPC2021-0220; Permitai iiii l*I1 Ti
(!City of
Carlsbad
Print Date: 06/16/2022
Job Address: 2858 CARLSBAD BLVD, CARLSBAD, CA 92008-2901
Permit Type: FIRE-Construction Commercial Work Class:
Parcel #: 2031730900 Track #:
Valuation: $351,559.04 Lot U:
Occupancy Group: Project #:
#of Dwelling Units: Plan #:
Bedrooms: Construction Type:
Bathrooms: Orig. Plan Check U:
Plan Check #:
Permit No: FPC2021-0220
Status: Closed - Finaled
Fixed Extinguishing Syste
Applied: 11/17/2021
Issued: 02/04/2022
Finaled Close Out: 06/14/2022
Final Inspection:
INSPECTOR: Cheung, Nathaniel
Project Title:
Description: FRESCO COCINA - 2ND REVISIONS TO KITCHEN FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATION
Applicant: FPContractor:
CALIFORNIA STATE FIRE PROTECTION CALIFORNIA STATE FIRE PROTECTION
SCOTT HIGUCHI 36140 JANA LN
36140 JANA LN WILDOMAR, CA 92595-8607-RIVERSIDE
WILDOMAR, CA 92595-8607-RIVERSIDE (951) 640-7205
(951) 461-6980
FEE AMOUNT
FIRE Hood & Duct Extinguishing System Initial Sys $458.00
FIRE Plan Resub (3rd&Subsequent Submittal/hr) $298.00
FIRE Plan Review (per hr - Regular Office Hours) $223.50
FIRE Plan Review (per hr - Regular Office Hours) $223.50
Total Fees: $1,203.00 Total Payments To Date: $1,203.00 Balance Due: $0.00
Fire Department Page 1 of 1
1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad CA 92008-7314 1 760-602-4665 1 760-602-8561 f I www.carlsbadca.gov
IF00fl aw
OWNER'S MANUAL
Pre-engineered
restaurant kitchen
fire extinguishing
system:
Model 11600 MAR 7 2022 ModelL3000 CI'IYOFNORCO
Modell.4600 BUJLDING&SAY
Model L6000
I_OLlf0OOcI14
$cHe iser iiu HE J
LOGISTICS
35 North Street, Suite 50 • Canandaigua, NY 14424 • 800.828.9638
CONGRATULATIONS:
You have purchased a fire suppression system designed and produced by the premier supplier of fire safety products
over the past 30 years. However, to guarantee the maximum effectiveness of your new Protex Series II fire suppression
system, you, as the owner/manager, must become familiar with your new equipment. For this purpose, we are pleased to
provide you with this owner's manual which will contain the following information:
APPLICATION
IN CASE OF FIRE
MAINTENANCE
MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY
Please note that this owner's manual is not a detailed installation, operation, and maintenance manual.
The detailed installation, operation, and maintenance manual, PROTEX SERIES II RESTAURANT KITCHEN FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM TECHNICAL MANUAL (Part Number 10053), is available upon request from any authorized
Protex distributor, or directly from Heiser Logistics. However, because it is difficult to completely understand every aspect
of an intricate pre-engineered system simply by reading the Technical Manual, Heiser Logistics will not be responsible for
system installation, modification, or recharge performed by any non-certified person(s).
APPLICATION
The Protex Series II is a pre-engineered restaurant fire suppression system, tested and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. under EX3470. It meets the stringent requirements of U.L. Standard 300. Your authorized Protex
Series II installer will install your system within the UL Listed design parameters. The following hazard areas of your
uipmeni snouia oe consiaerea ror
DUCT
Circular, square, or rectangular
sheet metal structure to
exhaust cooking vapors to
outside air.
COOKING APPLIANCES
All types of cooking appliances
should be protected, including
deep fat fryers, griddles, ranges,
and broilers. Radiant, lava rock,
and upright broilers should also
be protected.
HOOD
Collection area to
funnel grease laden
vapors to the duct.
The plenum area
of the hood (behind
the filters) must be
protected.
FUEL SHUT-OFF DEVICES
Equipment should be provided
to ensure fire control by
automatically shutting off
energy sources to cooking
equipment (gas or electric).
IN CASE OF FIRE
Fires can start in a cooking appliance, the hood, or the duct. In case of fire, it is important that you understand the
operation of your fire suppression system.
FIRST. Evacuate all personnel and customers from the fire area.
SECOND: Call the Fire Department.
THIRD: Operate Manual Pull (if needed) on way out of the building.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Record of Document Revisions . ii
GENERAL INFORMATION ....................................................
COMPONENTS ...............................................................3
Cylinders & Valve .........................................................3
Valve Rebuilding Equipment ............................................. 3
Cylinder Bracketing ......................................................4
Extinguishing Agent (P/NS RLI600 & RL3000) .........................4
Mechanical Control Head (P/N MCH2) ..................................4
Master Enclosure (P/N ENMCU2) .........................................
Slave Enclosure (P/N ENS) .................................................
Control Head Mounting Bracket P/N MBPZ) .........................5
Pneumatic Actuating Cylinder ...........................................5
Detection Equipment ....................................................6
Remote Mechanical Pull Station (P/N RPSM) ........................7
Gas Shutoff Valves.........................................................7
Corner Pulleys ............................................................8
Tee Pulley (P/N 1513) ......................................................9
Electrical Switches ........................................... .............. 9
Reset Relay (P/N 835) ........................................... ........... io
Pipe and Fittings .........................................................io
SYSTEM DESIGN ............................................................xi
System Cylinder Sizing ...................................................xx
Nozzle Coverage and Placement .......................................xx
lenum Protection .........................................................13
ppliance Protection ......................................................15
Design Index Chart and Nozzle Coverage Summary Sheet ...... 15
Fryers without Drip Board (High Mount Nozzle) ..................x6
Fryers without Drip Board (Low Mount Nozzle) ..................17
Fryers with Drip Board (High Mount Nozzle) ....................i8
Fryers with Drip Board (Low Mount Nozzle) ......................19
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan (High Mount Nozzle) .....................20
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan (Low Mount Nozzle) ....................21
Protecting Large Fryers by Dividing Their Area into Modues . .22
Two Burner Range (High Mount Nozzle) ...........................23
Four Burner Range .....................................................24
Four Burner Range Size & Radius Chart ................ .............. 25
Two Burner Range (Low Mount Nozzle) ............................26
Two Burner Range with High Proximity BackshelfPrtectin
(Low Mount Nozzle) ...................................................27
Small Wok (High Mount Nozzle) ....................................28
Small Wok (Low Mount Nozzle:. .................................... 29
Large Wok (High Mount Nozzle) ....................................30
Large Wok (Low Mount Nozzle ....................................31
Small Griddle (High Mount Nozzle) .................................32
Small Griddle (Low Mount Nozzle) .................................33
Large Griddle (High Mount Nozzle) .................................34
Large Griddle (Low Mount Nozzle) .................................35
Small Gas Radiant Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) ............36
Small Gas Radiant Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle) ............37
Large Gas Radiant Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) ............38
Large Gas Radiant Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle) ............39
Lava Rock Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) .....................40
Lava Rock Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle) .....................41
Natural Charcoal Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) .........42
Natural Charcoal Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)...............43
Mesquite Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) .....................44
Mesquite Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle) ........................45
Upright/ Salamander Broiler .............................................46
ChainBroiler ...............................................................47
Piping Limitations .........................................................48
General Piping Requirements ..........................................48
DesignSteps ...............................................................49
Example.....................................................................49
Detector Placement ......................................................52
SYSTEM INSTALLATION ......................................................53
Cylinder Installation ......................................................53
Control Head Installation ................................................53
Fusible Link Detector Installation .................................... 56
Setting the Control Head ................................................
Remote Pull Station Installation .......................................58
Gas Shut Off Valve Installation ....................................6o
Tee Pulley Installation ...................................................6i
Electrical Switch Installation ..........................................6x
Pipe and Nozzle Installation .............................................62
System Checkout After Installation ....................................62
Enclosure Installation Instructions
(P/N ENMCU2) and (P/N ENS) mounting ..............................63
Fusible Link Detector Installation ....................................63
Setting the ENMCUZ ......................................................64
Remote Pull Station Installation .......................................64
Gas Shut Off Valve Installation .......................................64
Electrical Switch Installation ..........................................6
Cylinder Installation ......................................................66
System Checkout After Installation ....................................67
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ...................................................69
Semi-annual Maintenance .............................................69
Annual Maintenance ......................................................69
12-year Maintenance ......................................................69
SYSTEM RECHARGE .........................................................71
SYSTEM CLEANUP ............................................................71
Components List ............................................................73
Material Safety Data Sheet ................................................75
S
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Part Number:10053
Protex II Restaurant Fire Suppression System Technical Manual
RECORD OF DOCUMENT REVISIONS
Rev Date Page Was Is
A 27 February 2002 All Written for UL review and approval Revised JAW UL instructions and comments
B 13 December 2005 67 6-Month Maintenance Procedures 5-11; 6-Month Maintenance Procedures 5
Inspect links; 1-Year Maintenance Procedures 12, reorder steps, replace links; 1-Year
1-5 Maintenance Procedures 1-3
B 13 December 2005 3 1st paragraph did not list L1600; Table 2-1: L1600 Tank information listed and included
did not include information for L1600 tank
B 13 December 2005 4 Cylinder Bracketing &MCH2 information Cylinder Bracketing &MCH2 information1
- - --
did not include L1600 includes L1600
B 13 December 2005 5 ENMCU2 & ENS information did not ENMCU2 & ENS information includes
include L1600 L1600
13 December 2005 45 Tank Chart and General Piping Tank Chart and General Piping
Requirements did not include L1600 Requirements include L1600 information
information
B 13 December 2005 51 Cylinder Installation did not include L1600 Cylinder Installation includes L1600
information information
B 13 December 2005 64 Single and Multiple Cylinder Installation Single and Multiple Cylinder Installation
information did not include L1600 information includes L1600
B 13 December 2005 69 System Recharge Step 5 did not include System Recharge Step 5 includes informatio
information for L1600 for L1600
rB 13 December 2005 71 Components List did 1600 Components List includes L1600
B 13 December 2005 73 Phone Number: 716 394-8692 Phone Number: 585 394-8692
C 12 December 2006 All Set in Helvetica type
C 12 December 2006 i Table of Contents for Rev. A
12 December 2006 1 Paragraph numbered 1: "chemical chain
reaction
C 12 December 2006 3
12 December 2006 4
C 12 December 2006 5 Re: P/N ENS: "used for vertical single
L1600. .
Set in Adobe Caslon Pro type
Updated Table of Contents for Rev. C
"chemical reaction" - -.
Added line of instructions for lubricating 0-
rings
Added line of instructions for lubricating 0- 1
"used for vertical mounting of a single
L1600. .
rCuDecember 2006 5 Fig 2-9: Added "opposite gauge" to callout of
discharge port; "diameter" to 4" measurement J
C 12 December 2006 6 Fig 2-11: Fusible Link callout pointed to 5- Call-out points to Fusible Link
Hook
C 12 December 2006 7 Fig. 2-13: Part RPSM pictured has Protex Updated picture shows Protex II faceplate
2000 faceplate
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 ii Part # 10053
ORev Date Page Was Is
12 December 2006 8 Fig 2-14: picture is of older gas valve Picture updated to show current gas valve
C 12 December 2006 9 Fig. 2-18: picture is drawing of Tee Pulley Photograph of T-Pulley
C 12 December 2006 9
C 12 December 2006 10
C 12 December 2006 10
C 12 December 2006 10
_ __ _- ---------------------------------------------- ___ ---.--
Added Fig. 2-19b: photo showing correct
method of making electrical connections
Information and photo of P/N SM120 Information and photo of p/n 835 Manual
Solenoid Monitor Reset Relay
Fig. 2-21: callout is for 0-ring Callout has been corrected to "Retaining 1
Ring (Clip)' J
Note box regarding marking of nozzles added
C 12 December 2006
C 12 December 2006
C 12 December 2006
C 12 December 2006
11 "...sections must be completed..."
11 "Each of the three..."
.sections must be completely understood..."
"Each of the four..."
11 Information and illustration of NL1L nozzle
duct coverage added; figure numbers updated
15 Mm. Nozzle Height for Large Griddle given Corrected to 10"
as 13'
12 December 2006 15
C 12 December 2006 22 Note in 2nd paragraph set in roman type
NL1L nozzle coverage of Ducts and Plenum
added
Note set in bold type
12 December 2006 22 Examples 1 & 2 added to illustrate process of
-- - -
modularizing large fryers
-
C 12 December 2006 23&24 Four Burner Range 24: Four Burner Range
Two Burner Range High Mount Nozzle 23: Two Burner Range High Mount Nozzle
C 12 December 2006 24 New instructions, diagram, and example for
Four Burner Range
C 12 December 2006 25 Insertion of page for Nozzle Positioning
Chart for Four Burner Range
C 12 December 2006 26 etseq. Pages renumbered to reflect insertion of page
for chart
C 12 December 2006 26 Two Burner Range Low Mount Nozzle Diagrams redrawn to show preferred
diagrams had no backshelf installations of low mount nozzle
FE 12 December 2006 27 Added Two Burner Range w/ High Proximity 1
Backshelf Protection (Low Mount Nozzle)
C 12 December 2006 28 etseq. Pages renumbered to reflect insertion of page
C 12 December 2006 30 (old) Small Griddle High Mount Nozzle included Instructions and diagram for NL2H added
32 (new) only NL1H
___------
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 iii Part # 10053
Flow numbers in Example = 8
Fusible link installation instructions call for
½" hex wrench
Current picture inserted
no more than 48 inches and no less than
42 inches above the floor...."
Current picture inserted
Current pictures inserted
Rev Date Page Was Is
C 12 December 2006 31 (old) Small Griddle Low Mount Nozzle included Instructions and diagram for NL2L added
33 (new) only NL1L
- -- 12 December 2006 33 (Old) Large Griddle Low Mount Nozzle mm. Large Griddle Low Mount Nozzle mm. - 1
35 (new) height 13" height 10"
C 12 December 2006 46 (old) Added Minimum Pipe Volumes for a Fryer,
48 (new) Range and Wok table
C 12 December 2006 47 (old) Flow numbers in Example = 9
49 (new)
C 12 December 2006 55 (old) Fusible link installation instructions call for
57 (new) 1' hex wrench
C 12 December 2006 55 (old)
r
Fig. 4-8 shows old MCH2
57 (new)
C 12 December 2006 56 (old) Remote Pull Station must be mounted "...no
58 (new) more than five feet above the floor...."
C 12 December 2006 56 (old) Fig. 4-13 shows old MCH2
58 (new)
C 12 December 2006 57 (old) Fig. 4-14 shows RPSM with old plate;
59 (new) Fig. 4-15 shows old MCH2
rc - 12 December 2006 58 (old) Fig. 4-17 shows old MCH2 Current picture inserted
60 (new)
C 12 December 2006 56 (old) Fig. 4-18 shows Tee Pulley drawing; Current pictures inserted
58 (new) Fig. 4-20 shows old MCH2
rC1 December 200669 (old) Step 10 calls for use of Measuring Stick P/N
71 (new) 551039
C 12 December 2006 70 (old) Recharge Adaptor Kit is P/N PCLAK
72 (new)
12 December 2006 70 (old)
72 (new)
C 12 December 2006 70 (old)
72 (new)
C 12 December 2006 71 (old)
Measuring Stick wording deleted
Part is replaced by P/N 551240
Note and Caution regarding recharging only
through the recharge adaptor added
Fig. 6-1 added: Recharge Adaptor and Quick
Connect
Parts list updated with new products and part
numbers
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 iv Part # 10053
Chapter 1 - General Information
CHAPTER I
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Protex Series II Restaurant Fre Suppression System is of the pre-engineered type as defined by NFPA 17A, Standardfor Wet Chemical
Extinguishing Systems and is desigEed to provide fire protection for restaurant cooking appliances, hoods, and ducts. The Protex Series II
wet chemical extinguishing system unit is intended to be installed, inspected, and maintained in accordance with the specifications outlined
in this manual and NFPA 17A, Standardfor Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems. Installation and maintenance of the system must conform
to the limitations detailed in this manual and be performed only by an Authorized Protex Series II dealer.
The Protex Series II System utilizes a wet chemical agent specifically designed to suppress restaurant cooking area fires. The system
provides automatic actuation and can be manually actuated through a remote mechanical pull station. Upon actuation, the system
discharges a pre-determined amount of agent through a fixed piping arrangement to the duct, plenum, and cooking appliances. The agent
acts to suppress fires in three ways
The chemical reaction causing combustion is interrupted by both the agent itself and the resulting steam formation.
The agent cools the fire bringing it below auto-ignition temperature.
The agent reacts with hot grease forming a soap-like layer (saponification) that helps prevent the escape of combustible vapors, thus
preventing re-ignition.
The shutdown of fuel and power tc. all appliances under protected ventilation equipment is required upon system actuation. The shutdown
of make-up or supply air is recommended upon system actuation but is not required. Exhaust fan(s) in the ventilation system should remain
on during system discharge as they assist the dispersion of chemical through the ventilating system. The system is UL Listed with or
without exhaust fan shutdown. ,EMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
he operating temperature range of the Protex Series II System is 32° F. (0° C.) minimum to 1200 F. (490 C.) maximum.
UL LISTING
The Protex Series II Wet Chemica. Extinguishing System Unit is Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Underwriters Laboratories
of Canada, Inc., and found to comply with UL300, Standard Fire Testing of Fire Protection Systems for Protection of Restaurant Cooking Areas,
and ULC/ORD-C1254.6-1995.
•
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 1 Part # 10053
Chapter 1 - General Information
NOTES: S
S
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 2 Part # 10053
Figure 2-2: Valve Cross Section.
VALVE REBUILDING EQUIPMENT
1. WET VALVE SEAL REBUILDING KIT
(P/N 490420698).
After system discharge, the valve assembly must be rebuilt to
ensure proper future operation. The Wet Valve Seal Rebuilding
Kit (P/N 490420698) should be used. It includes all components
necessary to properly rebuild the valve. See Figure 2-3 and Table
2-3.
Prior to assembly, 0-rings should be lubricated with Parker 0-
Ring Lube (P/N 0R3).
001
Figure 2-3: Wet Valve Seal Rebuilding Kit (P/N 490420698).
Item Part Number Description
I 490420761 Cap & Seat Washer
Sub-Assembly
2 385420705 Conical Spring
3 325420716 Neck 0-Ring
4 325420715 Piston 0-Ring
Table 2-3
Chapter 2 - Components
O CHAPTER!!
COMPONENTS
CYLINDERS & VALVE
The Protex Series II System has available four different size
cylinders with part numbers L1600, L3000, L4600, and L6000.
Cylinder sizes are expressed in terms of extinguishing agent
capacity (i.e., the L3000 uses 3.0 gallons of extinguishing
agent). The cylinder is manufactured, tested, and marked in
accordance with DOT 4BW225. Cylinders come pre-filled
with extinguishing agent and are charged with dry nitrogen
to a pressure of 225 psig @ 700 F. Cylinder and valve assembly
dimensions are shown in Figure 2-1 and Table 2-1.
Max. Flow Mounting
Point Bracket
Part No. A B C D Capacity Weight Used
L1600 7.00 19.62 25.37 17.31 5 33 lbs MBr5
L3000 8.00 25.06 30.81 22.75 10 53 lbs. MB,5
L4600 10.00 25.06 30.81 22.75 15 83 lbs. MB,5
L6000 10.00 c.8' 41.56 .50 20 ro8 lbs. MB,
Table 2-1
Figure 2-1: Cylinder and Valve Assemblies.
All cylinders utilize the same valve assembly (P/N 551175). It
is a pressure sealed poppet type valve designed to provide rapid
actuation and discharge of agent. See Figure 2-2 and Table 2-2.
Item Part Number Description
Valve Body
2 490420761 Cap & Seat Washer Sub-Assembly
3 385420705 Conical Spring
4 490020719 Piston
5 325420716 Neck 0-Ring
6 551236 Pressure Gage
7 490020831 Valve Cap & Shrader Valve Assembly
325420714 Valve Cap 0-Ring
9 325420715 Piston 0-Ring
10 550985 Pressure Regulator
10 Table 2-2
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 3
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 2 - Components
PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
(P/N 550985).
The pressure regulator assembly is available if the complete
regulator requires replacement (i.e., possible thread damage).
PRESSURE REGULATOR REBUILDING KIT
(P/N 551061).
After system discharge, the pressure regulator must be rebuilt to
ensure proper future operation. The rebuilding kit (P/N 551061)
should be used. It includes all components necessary to properly
rebuild the regulator. See Figure 2-4.
Prior to assembly, 0-rings should be lubricated with Parker 0-
Ring Lube (P/N 0R3).
IN VALVE BODY
INTERNAL
#6-32 x 3/8 IN -O-RING
F SCREW
SPRING
ON
EXTERNAL
#8-32 x 3/8 IN
HOLDING PISTON
SCREW 0-RING
Fig 2-4: Regulator Rebuild Kit (P/N 551061)
WET VALVE TOOL (P/N VTi)
The VT1 wet valve tool is designed to facilitate the rebuilding
of the wet valve assembly. It should be used to hold the wet valve
piston while unscrewing the cap and stem assembly. See Figure
2-5.
Figure 2-5: Wet Valve Tool (P/N VT1)
CYLINDER BRACKETING
Vertical bracketing of the L1600, L3000 and L4600 is provided
by the MB15 bracket kit. Vertical bracketing of the L6000 is
provided by the MB1 bracket kit. These kits must be ordered
separately with each cylinder/valve assembly. Cylinder installation
instructions are provided in the installation section of this manual.
/t CAUTION s
Be careful when handling and transferring wet agents,
because they are caustic. Wear goggles at all times. If you
get any agent into your eyes, flush them with clean water for
15 minutes and contact a physician. If you get any agent on
your skin, flush it with cold water to prevent irritation. The
agent is electrically conductive. You must clean up all agent
discharged around electrical appliances before you turn the
power back on.
EXTINGUISHING AGENT (PINS RL1600
& RL3000)
The agent used in Protex Series II Systems is a potassium
carbonate based solution that is extremely effective for grease
related kitchen fires. This agent is available for cylinder
recharging in 1.6 and 3.0 Gallon containers (P/Ns RL1600 &
RL3000). After system discharge, agent must be cleaned up
immediately with hot, soapy water to prevent corrosion of affected
surfaces.
MECHANICAL CONTROL HEAD
(PIN MCH2)
The MCH2 Mechanical Control Head is a fully mechanical
control head which can be connected to the L1600,
L3000/4600/6000 cylinder valve. This control head will support
a fusible link detection system, a remote mechanical pull station
(P/N RPSM), and a mechanical or electric gas shut-off valve.
Electrical switches (P/N MSSPDT2, MSDPDT2, MS3PDT2, or
MS4PDT2) can be ordered separately and field installed. There
is no local manual actuation for the MCH2. The MCH2 control
head can actuate a maximum of three (3) cylinders. See Figure
2-6.
mTexii
It ,
-1 TT
Figure 2-6: Mechanical Control Head (P/N MCH2)
[]
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 4 Part # 10053
Chapter 2 - Components
rh
ASTER ENCLOSURE (P/N ENMCU2)
e ENMCU2 Master Enclosure is used for vertical mounting
of a single L1600, L3000 or L4600 cylinder. The ENMCU2
Enclosure also includes a mechanical control unit, eliminating the
need for an MCH2 Control Head. See Figure 2-7. The L6000
cylinder cannot be mounted in an ENMCU2 Enclosure.
_pvoTezlt
28.125"
Pyolexfl
13.125" —* *— 10.625"
FRONT SIDE"
Figure 2-7: Enclosure (P/N ENMCU2)
SLAVE ENCLOSURE (P/N ENS)
PNEUMATIC ACTUATING CYLINDER
The PAC100 is a pneumatic actuating cylinder that can actuate a
maximum of ten (10) agent cylinders simultaneously. The PAC100
includes a DOT 4BA350 cylinder pressurized with dry nitrogen
to 350 PSIG @ 70 F., a brass valve with pressure gauge, and a
wall mounting bracket.
An MCH2 control head must be purchased separately and
connected to the PAC100 actuating cylinder to open the valve.
See Figure 2-9.
MCH2 CONTROL HEAD--)P-
(SOLD SEPARATELY)
3/4" DISCHARGE PORT
I P(OPPOSITE GAUGE)
14.50"
1225" 2025"
The ENS Enclosure is used for vertical mounting of a single l * 4.00" DIAMETER
9 1600, L3000 or L4600 cylinder when it is used as a secondary Figure 2-9: Pneumatic Actuating Cylinder (P/N PAC100)
gent cylinder in a system. The ENS Enclosure has no control
mechanism, and must be used in conjunction with an ENMCU2
Enclosure or an MCH2 Control Head. The L6000 cylinder
cannot be mounted in an ENS Enclosure.
CONTROL HEAD MOUNTING
BRACKET (P/N MBP2)
The MBP2 mounting bracket must be used to mount the MCH2
control head if the control head is not mounted directly on a
cylinder valve. See Figure 2-8.
0 Figure 2-8: Control Head Mounting Bracket (P/N MBP2)
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 5 Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 2 - Components
DETECTION EQUIPMENT
1. FUSIBLE LINK KIT (P/N 210SH).
The 210SH fusible link kit includes a 10" steel bracket, two :2)
1/2" EMT connectors, two (2) cable crimps, and two (2) "S"
hooks. Fusible links must be ordered separately. See Figure -10.
2. FUSIBLE LINK HANGER (P/N FLH25).
The VT T41 fusible link hanger is an accessory designed to
simplify the installation of fusible links in the fusible link line. It
can be used with the 210SH fusible link kit (kits must be ordered
separately). The Fusible Link Hanger makes it possible to install
fusible links without cutting and crimping loops in the fusible link
line for each link. See Figure 2-11.
LINK DETECTOR BRACKET(P/N 349)
S-HOOK (P/N 341S)
TERMINAL LINK
1/2" EMT CONNECTOR (P/N 800)
1/16" STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
FUSIBLE LINK-~
SERIES LINK CABLE CRIMP (P/N 310S)
Figure 2-13: Fusible Link Kit (P/N 2105H)
FUSIBLE LINK
BRACKET
(SOLD
SEPARATELY)
Figure 2-11: Fusible Link Hanger (P/N FLH25)
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 6 Part # 10053
Chapter 2 - Components .FUSIBLE LINKS.
he fusible link is designed to separate at a specific temperature,
releasing tension from the fusible link line, causing system
actuation. See Figure 2-12 and Table 2-4.
IN SE OF
RE
Figure 2-12: ML Style Fusible Link-
After determining the maximum ambient temperature at the
fusible link location, select the correct fusible link according to the
temperature condition chart below:
Maximum
Ambient
Part No. Temperature . 3231 35"F(35"C)
3232 142"F(61"C)
3233 21o"F(99"C)
3234 2C0" F (143 C)
3235 3E6' F (193 C)
3236 430 F (221 C)
Table 2-4
REMOTE MECHANICAL PULL STATION
(P/N RPSM)
Remote manual control for the MCH2 control head is provided by
the RPSM remote mechanical pull station. It is conaected to the
system control head by stainless steel cable. This cable is enclosed
in 1/2" EMT with corner pulleys at each change in jirection. The
remote mechanical pull station shah be located at th point of
egress. See Figure 2-13.
FIRE SUP F SSION S\STEM
&tI
SYSIM a,
Figure 2-13: Mechanical Pull Station (P/N RPSM).
GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
1. MECHANICAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE.
A gas shutoff valve is required on all systems used to protect
a gas fueled cooking appliance to stop gas flow in the event of
system actuation. See Figure 2-14. A mechanical gas valve can be
used with the MCH2 control head. It is connected to the system
control head by stainless steel cable. This cable is enclosed in 1/2"
EMT with a corner pulley at each change in direction. The valves
are rated for natural and LP gas (see Table 2-5). Mechanical gas
valves are available in the following sizes:
Parr No Valve Size
Maximum
Operating
Pressure
4075H 3/4" 5 psi
41ooH i5 psi
4125H I1/4" 5 psi
4r5oH I-1/2" 5 psi
4zooH 5 psi
4250 21/2' 5 psi
4300 5 psi
Table 2-5
S
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006
Page rev. C
7 Part# 10053
Chapter 2 - Components
Figure 2-14: 4000-Series Mechanical Gas Valve
2. ELECTRIC GAS SHUTOFF VALVE.
A gas shutoff valve is required on all systems used to protect a gas
fueled cooking appliance to stop gas flow in the event of system
actuation. See Figure 2-15. A UL Listed electric gas valve can
be used with the MCH2 control head. The valves are rated for
natural and LP gas. Valves are available in 120 VAC. Electric gas
valves are available in the following sizes, per Table 2-6:
Part No Valve Size
Maximum
Operating
Pressure
8075 3/4" 50 psi
81oo 2" 25 PSi
8125 11/4 25 psi
815o 1-1/2" 25 Psi
8200 25 psi
8250 21/2" 25 Psi
8300 25 psi
Table 2-6
Note: A UL Listed manual reset relay is required when using an
electric gas valve. The Protex Series II Reset Relay (P/N 835) may
be used for this purpose. See Figure 2-20.
CORNER PULLEYS
SET SCREW PULLEY (P/N 90SB).
A corner pulley is used whenever a change in stainless steel cable
direction is required. The 90SB corner pulley is equipped with a
set screw fitting for connection to 1/2" EMT. See Figure 2-16.
Figure 2-16: Corner Pulley (P/N 90SB).
COMPRESSION FITTING CORNER PULLEY
(P/N 90KBS).
A corner pulley is used whenever a change in stainless cable
direction is required. The 90KBS corner pulley is a grease-tight
corner pulley designed for areas likely to experience excessive
deposit build-up. It is equipped with a compression fitting for
connection to 1/2" EMT. See Figure 2-17.
Note: The 90KBS corner pulley is not a liquid tight seal for
penetration of hoods and/or ducts.
Figure 2-17: Corner Pulley (P/N 90KBS).
S
Figure 2-15: Electric Gas Shutoff Valve
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 8 Part # 10053
Chapter 2 - Components
0h,
EEPULLEY(P/N 1513)
Te 1513 tee pulley is used to connect two mechanical gas valves
or two remote mechanical pull stations to a single control head.
The tee pulley replaces two standard 900 corner pulleys. See
Figure 2-18.
[ CAUTION t
The Tee Pulley must never be used to connect multiple fusible
link lines to a single control head.
Figure 2-18: Tee Pulley (P/N 1513).
NOTE
7Alloliectrical connections must be made in an approved
box on the outside of the control head. The control
ot an approved electrical box.
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
The electrical switches are intended for use with electric gas
valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric
power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are
designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated.
NOTE
No electrical connections shall be made inside the control
head. All electrical wiring shall exit the control head
through the knock-out on the side of the box. All electrical
connections must be made in an approved electrical box.
Switches are available in kits: One Switch Kit, Part No.
MSSPDT2; Two Switch Kit, Part No. MSDPDT2; Three
Switch Kit, Part No. MS3PDT2, and Four Switch Kit, Part No.
MS4PDT2. Each switch has a set of single-pole, double-throw
contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP,
250, 277 VAC. Mounting hardware and 12" wire assemblies are
provided with each kit. See Figures 2-19 and 2-19b
Figure 2-19: Electrical Switch (P/N MSSPDT2).
JUNCTION
BOX
PTOR
Figure 2-19b: Electrical Connection
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 9 Part # 10053
NPT
'HREAD
318— 18 NPT
FEMALE
THREAD
30'
Rotati
RETAINING RING (CLI& STRAINER
(PIN 3254206251
-RING
'IN 325420625)
CAP
(PIN 325420623)
Chapter 2 - Components
RESET RELAY (P/N 835)
Electric gas valve wiring instructions are provided in the
installation section of this manual. See Figure 2-20.
FIRI SYSTEM ELECTRIC
GAS VALVE RESET
®Uflth
H.4... LVOWIC1, I.,
NV l424
Figure 2-20. Reset Relay (P/N 835)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
Pipe and fittings must be furnished by the installer. Schedule 40
stainless steel, chrome plated, or black pipe and fittings must be
used. Galvanized pipe and fittings are not to be used.
NOZZLES
Nozzles have been developed for appliance, plenum, and duct
applications. All nozzles have a specific flow point value and are
supplied with blow-off caps to prevent clogging. Each nozzle is
stamped with the model number. See Figure 2-21 and Table 2-7.
Application limitations are provided in the design section of this
manual.
Part No. Description Flow No.
NLIH I Nozzle
NLIL IL Nozzle
NLZH 211 Nozzle
NL2L 21, Nozzle 2
NL2D 20 Nozzle
Table 2-7
NOTE
Protex II Nozzles are marked as shown to include the word
"PYRO".
SWIVEL ADAPTOR (P/N 423572)
The Swivel adaptor consists of a swivel nut, swivel body, and
swivel ball. All are chrome-plated. The swivel adaptor allows the
nozzle to be rotated approximately 30 in all directions. See Figure
2-22.
Figure 2-22: Swivel Adaptor (P/N 423572)
Figure 2-21: Nozzles S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 10 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
CHAPTER III
SYSTEM DESIGN
GENERAL a maximum of 34 in. It can also protect a round duct with a
This section will cover the proper design of the Protex Series II maximum diameter of 31-7/8 in.
Restaurant Fire Suppression System. It is divided into four (4)
Two (2)NL2D duct nozzles can protect a square or rectangular sections: duct with a maximum of 150 in. perimeter, with the longest side
Cylinder Sizing being a maximum of 51 in. They can also protect a round duct
with a maximum diameter of 47-1/2 in.
Nozzle Coverage and Placement
Piping Limitations
Detector Requirements
Each of these sections must be completly understood before
attempting any installation.
SYSTEM CYLINDER SIZING
Each of the nozzles in the section, "Nozzle Coverage and
Placement" has its own flow point value. Each of the four
different agent tanks can support a maximum number of
flowpoints, based on the volume of the pipe used. Select the
system tank(s) by calculating the total number of flow points
ssociated with the appliances(s), plenum, and ducts, plus the total
piping volume.
d CAUTION it
Do not exceed the maximum number of flowpoints as shown
on the Tank Chart, page 48. If -he number of flow points
or the pipe volume required exceeds the amounts shown,
additional tank(s) or changes in piping design are required.
NOZZLE COVERAGE AND
PLACEMENT
This section will provide guidelins for determining nozzle
type, positioning, and quantity for duct, plenum, and appliance
protection.
A. DUCT PROTECTION
It is not required that the fan be saut down or the exhaust duct
be dampered for the system to operate properly. Each nozzle is
approved to protect exhaust ducts of unlimited length.
Duct protection requires that a nczzle be positioned to discharge
p
into the duct. Either a P/N NL1L or a P/N NL2D can be
used. The NL2D duct nozzle is a:two (2) flow nozzle. A single
NL2D nozzle is capable of protec:ing square or rectangular duct
with a maximum of 100 in. perimeter, with the longest side being
When two (2) NL2D duct nozzles are used to protect a single
duct, the cross sectional area of the duct must be divided into two
equal symmetrical areas. The nozzle must then be installed on the
centerline of the area it protects and aimed directly into the duct
opening.
The nozzle(s) must be installed on the centerline of the duct, with
the tip located 0 to 6 in. into the opening, and aimed directly into
the duct opening. See Figure 3-1.
INTO DUCT
2D NOZZLE
112
- ............. .-------------------------- . ...
t
1/2L-
L __
Figure 3-1
ONE-FLOW DUCT PROTECTION WITH 1L NOZZLE
(P/NNL1L)
The 1L Nozzle (P/N NL1L) is capable of protecting square or
rectangular ducts with a maximun perimiter of 50 in. (127 cm,),
with the longest side being a maximum of 17 in. (43.2 cm.). It can
also protect a round duct with a maximum diameter of 16 in. (40.6
cm.) See figures 3-2 &-3-3.
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006
Page rev. C
11 Part# 10053
Figure 3-7 S
Chapter 3 - System Design
8'
17"
PERIMETER -'- ------------ -----.--.---- . MEASUREMENT
Figure 3-2: Maximum rectangular duct perimeter of 50"
Figure 3-5
C. MULTIPLE RISERS
In cases of multiple risers, each riser is protected as an individual
duct. See Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-3: Maximum round duct diameter of 16'
TRANSITION DUCTS
The protection of non-standard ducts should be reviewed by the
authority having jurisdiction. Protex Series II recommends that
transition ducts be protected as follows:
CT
PLENUM S
PERIMETER -'
1/2 -Al INTO MEASUREMENT/
TRANSITION
+
(.
Figure 3-4
TRANSITION DUCTS - LARGER TO SMALLER
In cases where the duct/plenum interface opening is larger than
the final exhaust duct, measure the perimeter/diameter of the duct
halfway between the largest and smallest section (or the average
perimeter/diameter). The nozzle is to be located within 0-6 in. of the
duct/plenum interface (not at the point where the measurement, was
taken), centered under the final exhaust duct opening. See Figure
3-4.
TRANSITION DUCTS - SMALLER TO LARGER
In cases where the duct/plenum interface opening is smalle. than
the final exhaust duct, measure the perimeter/diameter of the Final
exhaust duct. The nozzle(s) is to be located within 0-6 in. of the
duct/plenum interface, centered in the opening. See Figure 3-5.
Fig 3-6
ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR
Ducts utilizing electrostatic precipitators must be protected
above and below the unit. Standard duct nozzles are used in this
application. See Figure 3-7.
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 ' - 12 Part # 10053
V-BANK
SINGLE BANK
Chapter 3 - System design
PLENUM PROTECTION
The NL1H nozzle is a one (1) flow nozzle used for plenum
protection. A single NL1H nozzle can protect a plenum (with
single or V-bank filters) 10 ft. long by 4 ft. wide. Dividing the
length into sections equal to or less than 10 ft. in length and
positioning a nozzle at the start of each section can be done to
protect longer plenums.
On V-bank plenums, the nozzle(s) must be located at the center
of the V-bank width, 1/3 of the vertical height of the filters. On
single filter bank plenums, the nozzle must be located 2 in. from
the back edge of the filter, 1/3 down from the vertical height.
For either application, the nozzle must be located within 6 in. of
the end of the plenum (or module) and aimed directly down the
length of the plenum. See Fig. 3-8.
S
Figure
3-8.
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 13 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
NOTES: I
S
S
. 4~ ,
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 14 Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
0 P.
APPLIANCE PROTECTION
Note: When protecting appliances which are larger than single
nozzle coverage, multiple nozzles can be used.
to or smaller than single nozzle coverage. Exception: Fryers must
not exceed a maximum of 864 sq. in. For modularizing fryers,
refer to "Protecting Large Fryers by Dividing Their Area Into
Modules," page 22.
Larger appliances can be divided into several modules, each equal
Design Index Chart and Nozzle Coverage Summary Sheet
Min Max
Max Max Max Nozzle Nozzle
Nozzle Flow Depth Length Area Height Height
Appliance Mount Figure Type Points Max Width (in) (in) (in) (in2 (in) (in)
Deep Fat Fryer - Vat H 3-3 NL2H 2 19-1/2 19 24 48
Deep Fat Fryer - Vat L 3-4 NL2L 2 19-1/2 19 13 24
Deep Fat Fryer w/ drip board H 3-5 NL2H 2 Deep Vat 27-3/4 324 24 48
(Condition 1) Overall Cooking Area 18 500 24 48
Deep Fat Fryer w/ drip board H 3-5 NL2H 2 Deep Vat 19-1/2 371 24 48
(Condition 2)
-
Overall Cooking Area 25-3/8 495 24 48
Deep Fat Fryer wl drip board L 3-5 NL2L 2 Deep Vat 18 324 13 24
(Condition 1) Overall Cooking Area 27-3/4 500 13 24
Deep Fat Fryer w/ drip board L 3-5 NL2L 2 Deep Vat 19-1/2 371 13 24
(Condition 2) Overall Cooking Area 25-3/8 495 13 24
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan H 3-7 NL2H 2 27-3/4 500 24 48
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan L 3-8 NL2L 2 27-3/4 500 13 24
Four Burner Range -
3-9 NL2L 2 28 28 34 48
Two Burner Range H 3-10 NL1H 1 12 28 40 50
Burner Range - L 3-11 NL1L 1 12 28 13 24 ,,Two
Two Burner Range H 3-11b NL2L 2 12 28 24 35
Small Wok H 3-12 NL1H 1 24" dia. 6 24 48
Small Wok L 3-13 NL1L 1 24" dia. 6 13 24
Large Wok H 3-14 NL2H 2 30' dia. 8 24 48
Large Wok
-
L 3-15 NL2L 2 30" dia. 8 13 24
Small Griddle H 3-16 NL1H 1 36 1080 24 48
Small Griddle L 3-17 NL1L 1 36 1080 10 24
Large Griddle H 3-18 NL2H 2 48 1440 24 48
Large Griddle L 3-19 NL2L 2 48 1440 10 24
Gas Radiant Char-Broiler H 3-20 NL1H 1 26 624 24 48
Gas Radiant Char-Broiler L 3-21 NL1L 1 26 624 13 24
Large Gas Radiant Char-Broiler H 3-22 NL2H 2 36 864 36 48
Large Gas Radiant Char-Broiler L 3-23 NL2L 2 36 864 13 36
Lava Rock Char-Broiler H 3-24 NL2L 2 26 624 24 35
Lava Rock Char-Broiler L 3-25 NL2L 2 26 624 15 24
Natural Charcoal Char-Broiler H 3-26 NL1H 1 24 480 24 35
(max. fuel depth 6")
Natural Charcoal Char-Broiler L 3-27 NL1L 1 24 480 15 24
Mesquite Char-Broiler H 3-28 NL1H 1 24 480 24 35
(max. fuel depth 6')
Mesquite Char-Broiler L 3-29 NL1L 1 24 480 15 24
Upright/Salamander Broiler 3-30 NL1L 1 36 28 Front Edge
above the grate
Chain Broiler (Internal Chamber) 3-31 NL1L 1 27 38 Front Edge 1-3'
above the chain
Plenum Single Bank / V Bank H NL1H 1 48 120 0-6" from end of
plenum
Duct •.
Perim. Diameter
(in)
Rectangular/Circular Duct NL2D 2 34 no limit 100 31-7/8
Rectangular/Circular Duct NL1L 1 17 50 16
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 15 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Fryers Without Drip Board (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
(no drip board)
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL2H
2 (Two)
1 (One)
19 inches x 19-1/2 inches
Anywhere over the cooking surface.
24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
See figure 3-3
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Figure 3-3
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 16 Part # 10053
S
Chapter 3 - System design
Fryers Without Drip Board (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
(no drip board)
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL2L
2 (Two)
1 (One)
19 inches x 19-1/2 inches
Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
13 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
See figure 3-4
- Nozzle must be located anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface,
S
Figure 3-4
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 17 Part # 10053
OVERALL
COOKING AREA
LONGEST SIDE
DIMENSION
27-3/4'
500 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING
AREA
OVERALL
COOKING AREA
LONGEST SIDE
DIMENSION
25-3/8'
324 SQUARI
INCHES -
MAXIMUM
DEEP VAT
AREA
371 SQUAR]
INCHES -
MAXIMUM
DEEP VAT
AREA
DRLPBOARD
18
LONGEST
SIDE
DIMENSION
(DEEP VAT)
DRIPBOARD
Condition 1
Chapter 3 - System Design
Fryers with Drip Board (High Mount Nozzle) S
Compulsory Nozzle NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection
Condition .1
Deep Vat Cooking Area 324 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 18 inches.
(excludes drip board)
Overall Cooking Area 500 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 27-3/4 inches.
(includes drip board)
Condition 2
Deep Vat Cooking Area 371 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 19-1/2 inches.
(excludes drip board)
Overall Cooking Area 495 square: inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 25-3/8 inches.
(includes drip board)
Nozzle Location Anywhere over the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Graphic Representation See Figure 3-5
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
495 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING
RE
19½"
J LONGEST
SIDE
DIMENSION
(DEEP VAT)
Condition 2 S
Figure 3-5
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 18 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Fryers with Drip Board (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL21,
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection
Condition 1
Deep Vat Cooking Area 324 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 18 inches.
(excludes drip board)
Overall Cooking Area 500 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 27-3/4 inches.
(includes drip board)
Condition 2
Deep Vat Cooking Area 371 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 19-1/2 inches.
(excludes drip board)
Overall Cooking Area 495 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 25-3/8 inches.
(includes drip board)
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-6
Nozzle must be located anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
OVERALL OVERALL
COOKING AREA COOKING AREA
LONGEST SIDE LONGEST SIDE
DIMENSION INCHES i DIMENSION
MAXIMUM -3/8 27-3/4" 25
L j
- I
I,..,
COOKING
AREA
495 SQUARE
/ INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING
AREA
371 SQUARI
INCHES -
MAXIMUM
DEEP VAT
AREA
324 SQUARI
INCHES -
MAXIMUM
DEEP VAT
AREA
DRIPBOARD
S Condition 1 Condition 2
- 18" I 19½"
LONGEST DRIPBOARD I 7LONGEST
SIDE SIDE
DIMENSION DIMENSION
(DEEP VAT) (DEEP VAT)
Figure 3-6
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 19 Part # 10053
/
/
I
I
500 SQUARE
INCHES MAXIMUM
COOKING SURFACE
Chapter 3 - System Design
Note Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan (High Mount Nozzle) S
Tilt skillets or
braising pans
generally use a
hinged cover.
Nozzle(s) are
to be placed at
the front edge
of the appliance
cooking area to
minimize the
potentialfor
the tilt skillet
or braising
Pan cover to
interfere with
the nozzle
discharge. See
Note, below.
Compulsory Nozzle NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (one)
Maximum Area of Protection 500 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 273/4
inches
Nozzle Location Positioned near the front edge of the pan. The nozzle(s) must be
completely clear of the pan cover with an unobstructed view to the back
of the pan.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the front to back centerline of the pan.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-7
Modularized Coverage 2. Divide the cooking area into modules, each
Tilt Skillets and Braising Pans generally require of which can be nrotected by a single nozzle
modularized coverage. Use the following steps to as specified in the
determine modular coverage: design chart.
1. Measure the length and width of the Tilt 3. Ensure that no single nozzle exceeds its
Skillet/Pan cooking area. limitations for area or longest side
Nozzle must be located anywhere along thefront edge of the cooking area,
and aimed at the center of the cooking area.
- ' 27~
MAXIMUM
LONGEST SIDE
DIMENSION J
Note
The nozzle must be completely clear of the pan cover,
with an unobstrocted flow to the back of the pan.
Figure 3-7
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 20 Part # 10053
500 SQUARE INCHES
MAXIMUM COOKING
SURFACE
LO
S
Chapter 3 - System design
6~
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (one)
Maxamum Area of Protection 500 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 273/4
inches
- Nozzle Location Positioned near the front edge of the pan. The nozzle(s) must be
completely clear of the pan cover with an unobstructed view to the back
of the pan.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the front to back centerline of the pan.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-8
Modularized Coverage 2. Divide the cooking area into modules, each
Tilt Skillets and Braising Pans generally require of which can be protected by a single nozzle
modularized coverage. Use the following steps to
as specified in the
determine mular coverage:
design chart.
1. Measure te length and width of the Tilt 3. Ensure that no single nozzle exceeds its
Skillet/Pan cooking area. limitations for area or longest side
Nozzle must be located anywhere along thefront edge of the cooking area,
-
and aimed at the center of the cooking area.
- -
Note
Tilt skillets or
braising pans
generally use a
hinged cover.
Nozzle(s) are
to be placed at
the front edge
of the appliance
cooking area to
minimize the
potentialfor
the tilt skillet
or braising
Pan cover to
interfere with
the nozzle
discharge. See
Note, below.
Figure 3-8
Note
The nozzle must be completely clear of the pan cover,
with an unobstrocted flow to the back of the pan.
i.kn
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 21 Part # 10053
Note
None of the maximum dimensions may be exceeded. If
either the maximum vat or overall sizes are exceeded, the
area divided into modules will need to be redefined with the
possibility of an additional nozzle.
_ 26" EXAMPLE 1 26s32=832 sq. in.
i. 8 = 2.56 nozzles
32 I 324 longest side: 27~
No I
t I
drip board I
I
83 2. 2 = 2.24 nozzles
s longest side: 253/8"
Use #1 because it meets the longest side
- z6" - Startfrom the back of
the vat, andfigure the 4 0 I opposite side
I. 324 = 22.46"
26
12 46" 0
1
Old method t would have
7.08" 0 required
nozzles
- - - po Or you could just z6" 26"
equally divide the three A I I I I 10661 0 ' sections in ,o.66" each i 1 32" o o
10.661 0 I I I : I
10.661
24" - 24X30720 sq. in. EXAMPLE 2
I. 720 = 2.22 nozzles
324 longest side: 271/4" (with drip Soo sq. in.)
30
2. 720 = 1.9 nozzles
372 longest side: 253/8" (with drip 495 sq.in.)
6" Use #2 because it meets the longest side
and requires fewer nozzles
.4—. 24" .-.—Ø.
4 4 0 '5.45"
30
I 54.55 0
Old method
would have
required 4
nozzles 0
OH
Startfrom the back of the vat, andfigure the
opposite side
371 sq. in. = 55.45 in.
24 in. longest side: 273/4"
(with drip 500 sq.in.)
24X15.45 = 370.8 sq. in.
241554.55 = 349.2
Now you need to include the drip board
14.55" + 6" = 20.55"
24" 5 20.55" = 493.2 sq. in.
ibis does not exceed allowable sq. in. sf495
(included in our set ofnumbers)
2 nozzles would cover this fryer
Chapter 3 - System Design
Protecting Large Fryers by Dividing Their Area Into Modules 0
When protecting fryers larger than those previously described,
the area requiring protection can be divided into modules. In the
standard fryer protection coverages, you will notice that a fryer
without a drip board has a larger vat area than a fryer with a drip
board. While very specific limitations apply, a larger fryer that
requires modular protection could include both circumstances: a
portion of the fryer with a drip board and a portion of the fryer
without a drip board. Dividing the modules into either deep
vat only or deep vat with drip board can maximize the modular
coverage.
Note: The maximum size of a fryer that can be modularized is
864 square inches (6 square feet).
If the fryer has no drip board, use design charts 3-3 or 3-4
depending on whether the appliance is a high or low mount
application. As the fryer does not have a drip board, the
maximum overall cooking area will be the same as the maximum
deep vat area. Use the following steps to determine the modular
coverage;
Measure the internal length and width of the deep vat.
Ensure the total area to be protected does not exceed
864 square inches (6 square feet).
Divide the deep vat into modules, each of which can be
protected by a single nozzle as specified in the design
chart.
Ensure that no single nozzle exceeds its limitations for
area or longest side
If the fryer contains a drip board use the design charts 3-5 or
3-6 for fryers depending on whether the appliance is a high or
low mount application. Use the following steps to determine the
modular coverage;
Measure the internal length and width of the deep vat.
Measure the internal length and width of the hazard
area including drip board area.
Ensure the total area to be protected does not exceed
864 square inches (6 square feet).
Divide the deep vat into modules, each of which can be
protected by a single nozzle as specified in the design
charts.
If the module does not include any portion of the drip board, the
maximum overall cooking area will be the same as the maximum
deep vat area in the design chart.
If the module includes any portion of the drip board, the
maximum deep vat area and overall cooking area limitations must
be adhered to.
324 sq. in.; 273/4" longest side; maximum area with drip-500 sq. in.
371 sq. in.; z%" longest side; maximum area with drip-495 sq. in.
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 22 Part # 10053
Two Burner Range (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 12 inches x 28 inches
Nozzle Location Center of the cooking surface only.
Nozzle Height 40 inches to 50 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Directly down only.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-10
S
Note
The range
cannot be under
a backshelf
when using
high-mount
protection.
28"
Chapter 3 - System Design
Nozzle must be located (beigbtwise) anywhere within the shaded area,
and centered above the cooking surface.
Figure 3-10
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 23 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Four Burner Range
Note
The range
cannot be under
a backshelf
when using
high mount
Protection.
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL2L
2 (Two)
1 (One)
28 inches x 28 inches
Center of the cooking surface only.
34 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Directly down only.
See figure 3-9
Example: A four burner range has a hazard size of 20 in. (51 cm) in length and 27 in. (69
cm) in width. Follow down the Range Length column in the Nozzle Positioning Chart until
you come to 20 in. (51 cm). Continue down this column until the correct width appears in
the width column. When the width of 27 in. (69 cm) is arrived at, read across to the radius
column to determine the size of radius allowed, for positioning of the nozzle, from the hazard
area centerline. In this example, the correct radius is 3 in. (8 cm). The nozzle can be aimed
straight down anywhere within a 3 in. (8 cm) radius of the hazard area centerline.
Nozzle must be located (heigbtwise) anywhere within the shaded area,
- and centered above the cooking surface.
Figure 3-9
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 24 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Nozzle Positioning Chart for Four Burner Range
RANGE RANGE WIDTH RADIUS
LENGTH 'L' 'W' 'R'
in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
25 (64) 23 (58) A ()
25 (64) [ 24 (61) 21/2 (6)
25 (64) 25 (64) 2½ (5)
25 (64) 26 (66) 13/4 ()
25 (64) 27 (69) 13/8 ()
25 (64) z8 (i,) , (z)
26 (66) IS (46) 4 (io)
26 (66) 19 (48) 3/4 (,o)
26 (66) 20 (si) 33/8 (9)
26 (66) 21 () 31/8 (8)
26 (66) 22 (6) 23/4 ()
26 (66) 23 (8) 2½ (6)
26 (66) 24 (61) 21/8 ()
z6 (66) 25 (64) 13/4 ()
26 (66) 26 (66) 13/8 ()
26 (66) 27 (69) i (2)
26 (66) 28 (ii) 3/4 (z)
27 (69) IS (46) 35/8 ()
27 (69) 19 (48) 3'/4 (8)
27 (69) 20 (si) 3 (8)
27 (69) 21 (s) 23/4 ()
27 (69) 22 (6) z% (6)
27 (69) 23 (58 z½ ()
27 (69) 24 (61) 13/4 ()
27 (69) 25 (64) 13/8 ()
27 (69) 26 (66) i (z)
27 (69) 27 (69) 3/4 (2)
27 (69) 28 ('i) 3/8 (I)
28 (71) IS (46) 31/8 (8)
28 (vi) 19 (48) A ()
28 (71) 20 (sr) I 2% ()
28 (ii) [ 21 (si) z¼ (6)
28 (71) 22 (6) 2 (s)
28 (i,) 23 (58) i% ()
28 (sn) 24 (61) 13/8 ()
28 (ii) 25 (64) i (2)
Z8 (i,) 26 (66) 3/4 (2)
28 ('i) 27 (69) 3/8 (I)
28 ('i) 28 (n) 0 (o)
RANGE RANGE
LENGTH'L'
in. (cm) in.
18 (46) 18
is (46) '9
IS (46) 20
IS (46) 21
IS (46) 22
IS (46) 23
IS (46) 24
,S (46) 25
IS (46) z6
IS (46) 27
IS (46) 28
'9 (48) IS
'9 (48) '9
'9 (48) 20
'9 (48) 21
'9 (48) 22
'9 (48) 23
'9 (48) 24
'9 (48) 25
19 (48) 26
19 (48) 27
'9 (48) 28
20 (si) 18
20 (51) '9
20 (si) 20
20 (ii) 21
20 (ii) 22
20 (si) 23
20 (si) 24
20 (51) 25
20 (51) 26
20 (51) 27
20 (si) 28
21 (53) 18
21 (53) 19
21 (53) { 20
21 (ç) 21
21 (53) 22
Zr (53) 23
21 (s) 24
21 (s) 25
WIDTH RADIUS
(cm) in. (cm)
(46) 1 7½ (i8)
(48)
[
63/4 (17)
(50 63/8 (16)
J 6 (is)
(6) 5 5/g (14)
(8) '% ('3)
(60 4/4 (12)
(64) 4/8 (II)
(66) 4 (io)
(69) 3% (9)
(7') I 3½ (8)
(46) 63/4 (17)
(48) 63/8 (16)
(50 6 (15)
(53) 5'/S (i)
(6) 51/4 (13)
(58) 4/8 (12)
(61) 4½ (ii)
(64) 4½ (io)
(66) 33/4 (9)
(69) 31/4 (8)
(7') 23Y8 (7)
(46) I 63/8 (16)
(48) 6 05)
(ii) % (14)
() 1% (j)
(6) 4Y8 (12)
(8) 4½ (ii)
(61) 4½ (io)
(64) 04 (9)
(66) 3% (8)
(69) 3 (7)
(71) 25/8 (6)
(46) 6 (15)
(48) '/s (14)
() 1% (ii)
(53) 5 (12)
(6) 4% (II)
(58) 4V4 (io)
(60 3i (io)
(64) 3½ (9)
RANGE RANG
LENGTH 'L'
in. (cm) in.
21 (s) 26
21 (53) 27
21 (53) 28
22 (6) 18
22 (6) '9
22 (s6) 20
22 (6) 21
22 (6) 22
22 (56) 23
22 (6) 24
22 (6) 25
22 (6) 26
22 (6) 27
22 (6) 28
23 (8) IS
23 (58) '9
23 (8) 20
23 (8) 21
23 (58) 22
23 (8) 23
23 (8) 24
23 (8) 25
23 (8) z6
23 (58) 27
23 (58) 28
24 (6i) 18
24 (6i) '9
24 (6i) 20
24 (6,) 21
24 (6') 22
24 (6i) 23
24 (6,) 24
24 (6i) 25
24 (6i) 26
24 (6i) 27
24 (6i) 28
25 (64) IS
25 (64) '9
25 (64) { 20
25 (64) 21
25 (64) J 22
E WIDTH RADIUS
(cm) in (cm)
(66) 3½
(69) 2%
(7,) 21/4
(46) %
(48) 1%
(51) 4Y8
(53) 4%
(56) 41/4
(8) 3Y8
(6,) 3½
(64) 3½
(66) 23/4
(69) z%
(71) 2
(46) 51/4
(48) 4N
(s,) 4½
(53) 41/4
(6) 3Y8
(8) 3½
(6,) 3½
(64) A
(66) 2½
(69) 2½
(71) i%
(46) 4/4
(48)
[
4½
(51) 4½
(53) 338
(6) 3½
(58) 3½
(6,) 2318
(64) 2½
(66) 2½
(69) i1/4
(71) 13/8
(46)
(48) 4½
(51) 33/4
(53) 3½
(6) 3½
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 25 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Note
If the range has
a backshelf, the
nozzle has to
be equal to or
below the height
of the shelf
and be within
limitations
of the nozzle
height.
Two Burner Range (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 12 inches x 28 inches
Nozzle Location 22 inches from the opposite edge of the hazard area and centered right
to left.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 231/2 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at a point equal to one half of the nozzle height above the
appliance and along the right-left centerline.
Example: If the nozzle was mounted 23 inches above the cooking surface, the
aiming point would be 11112 inches from the opposing edge of the appliance
on which the nozzle is located. See illustrations Example 1 and Example 2
below.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-11
Nozzle must be located (beighiwise) anywhere within the shaded area,
and located on the left-ri!ht center line above the cookini surface.
12"
EXAMPLE 1
Nozzle is 13"
above surface &
aimed 61h' from
opposite edge of
cooking surface.
(13/2=6½)
EXAMPLE 2 (
'T Nozzle is 23"
above surface 23
& aimed 11½"
from rear of 1
cooking surface. . 7::-, >J
(23/2=11½)
t
22' VARIES- All
SEE
NOZZLE
AIMING
AND
EXAMPLES
1&2
-
CL I
28"
fl
Figure 3-11.
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 26 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
0 Two Burner Range with High Proximity Backshelf Protection (Low Mount Nozzle)
Note
Although most
shelves exceed
11 inches in
overall depth,
make sure the
shelf does not
exceed 11 inches
overhang of the
burner.
Compulsory Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 12 inches x 28 inches
Nozzle Location Over the front edge of the front burner; on the front-to-rear center line.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 35 inches above the cooking surface
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at a point 10 inches forward frzm the back burner on the front-
to-rear center line
Graphic Representation See figure 3-11b
must be located over thefront edge of thefront burner, oriented with the nozzle tip aimed on thefront-to-back centerline,
and aimed 10 inches forward ofthe hack burner on the front-to-back center line.
Shelf can overhang burner(s)
a maximum of 11"
20" minimum
24" - 35"
10" from
back burner
Figure 3-11b
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 27 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design 11
Small Wok (High Mount Nozzle) S
Compulsory Nozzle NL1H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 24 inches maximum diameter and 6 inches maximum depth.
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the Wok.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 48 inches above the top edge of the Wok.
Nozzle Aiming Directly at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-12
-0
Nozzle must be located anywhere along the perimeter of the Wok,
and aimed at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
S
Figure 3-12
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 28 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
0 Small Wok (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL11,
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 24 inches maximum diameter and 6 inches maximum depth.
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the Wok.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 24 inches above the top edge of the Wok.
Nozzle Aiming Directly at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-13
S
Nozzle must be located anywhere along the perimeter of the Wok,
- - and aimed at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
I I I
Figure 3-13
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 29 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Large Wok (High Mount Nozzle) 0
Compulsory Nozzle NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection Greater than 24 inches diameter to 30 inches in diameter and 8 inches maximum depth.
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the Wok.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 48 inches above the top edge of the Wok.
Nozzle Aiming Directly at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-14
Nozzle must be located anywhere along the perimeter of the Wok,
and aimed at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
Figure 3-14
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 30 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Large Wok (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulso:y Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Pr Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection Greater than 24 inches diameter to 30 inches in diameter and 8 inches maximum depth.
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the Wok.
Nozie Height 13 inches to 24 inches above the top edge of the Wok.
Nozzle Aiming Directly at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-15
Nozzle must be located anywhere along the perimeter of the Wok,
and aimed at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
Figure 3-15
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 31 Part # 10053
NOZZLE
CAN BE
MOUNTED
AT EITHER
END
Figure 3-16b: NL2H Nozzle Figure 3-16a: NL1H Nozzle
Chapter 3 - System Design
Small Griddle (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1H or NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One) NL1H or 2 (Two) NL2H
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One) NL1H or 1 (One) NL2H
Maximum Area of Protection 1080 square inches with a longest side dimension of 36 inches
Nozzle Location NL1H: Above any corner of the cooking surface.
NL2H: 0 to 6 in. from either of the short sides of the cooking surface
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming NL1H: At a point 12 inches in and 12 inches over from the corner below the nozzle.
NL2H: At the center of the cooking surface
Graphic Representation See figures 3-16a &3-16b
NL1H Nozzle must be located directly above any corner of the cooking surface
and aimed at the intersecting point 12 inchesfrom each side of the corner below the nozzle.
NL2HNozzle must be located 0 to 6 inchesfrom either of the short sides of the cooking surface,
-
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface 1 0
Tl~ NOZZLE CAN BE
MOUNTED ABOVE -1 ANYCORNER
21"
1080 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING AREA
SHORT
SIDE OF
COOKING
SURFACE
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 32 Part # 10053
NOZZLE
CAN BE
MOUNTED
AT EITHER
END
' )-
Tl~' NOZZLE CAN BE
MOUNTED ABOVE
ANYCORNER
1080 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING AREA
SHORT
SIDE OF •.,
COOKING
SURFACE
1~
Chapter 3 - System design
Small Griddle (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1L or NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One) NL1L or 2 (Two) NL2L
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One) NL1L or 1 (One) NL2L
Maximum Area of Protection 1080 square inches with a longest side dimension of 36 inches
Nozzle Location NL1L: Above any corner of the cooking surface.
NL2L: 0 to 6 in. from either of the short sides of the cooking surface
Nozzle Height 10 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming NL1L: At a point 12 inches in and 12 inches over from the corner below the nozzle.
NL2L: At the center of the cooking surface
Graphic Representation See figures 3-17a & 3-17b
NL1L Nozzle must be located directly above any corner of the cooking surface
o and aimed at the intersecting point 12 inchesfrom each side of the corner below the nozzle.
NL2L Nozzle must be located 0 to 6 inchesfrom either of the short sides of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface_
Figure 3-17a: NL1L Nozzle Figure 3-17b: NL2L Nozzle
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2006 33 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Large Griddle (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL2H
2 (Two)
1 (One)
1440 square inches with a longest side dimension of 48 inches
Above any corner of the cooking surface.
24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
At a point 12 inches in and 12 inches over from the corner below the nozzle.
See figure 3-18
Nozzle must be located directly above any corner of tbe cooking surface and aimed at
the intersecting point 12 inches from each side of the corner below the nozzle.
I NOZZLE CAN BE
I MOUNTEDABOVE
u ANYCORNER
S
1440 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING AREA
Figure 3-18
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 34 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Large Griddle (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 1440 square inches with a longest side dimension of 48 inches
Nozzle Location Above any corner of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 10 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming At a point 12 inches in and 12 inches over from the corner below the nozzle.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-19
Nozzle must be located directly above any corner of the cooking surface and aimed at
the intersecting point 12 inchesfrom each side of the corner below the nozzle.
I NOZZLE CAN BE
I. MOUNTED ABOVE
i ANYCORNER
S
1440 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING AREA
Figure 3-19
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 35 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Small Gas Radiant Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1H
1 (One)
1 (One)
624 square inches with a longest side dimension of 26 inches.
Anywhere over the cooking surface.
24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the broiler.
See figure 3-20
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
S
Figure 3-20
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 36 Part # 10053
ARE
tIM
Chapter 3 - System design
Small Gas Radiant Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 624 square inches with a longest side dimension of 26 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-21
S
S
Nozzle must be located anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Figure 3-21
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 37 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Large Gas Radiant Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle) I
Compulsory Nozzle NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 864 square inches with a longest side dimension of 36 inches
Nozzle Location Above any corner of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 36 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-22
Nozzle must be located directly above any corner of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
ki
NOZZLE CAN BE
MOUNTED ABOVE
ANY CORNER
864 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING
AREA
I
Figure 3-22
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 38 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Large Gas Radiant Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL21,
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 864 square inches with a longest side dimension of 36 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 36 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-23
-
Nozzle must be located anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
it 36
op
3',,,
LONGEST 864 SQUARE
SIDE INCHES
DIMENSION MAXIMUM
COOKING
AREA
S
Figure 3-23
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 39 Part # 10053
I
Chapter 3 - System Design
Lava Rock Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 624 square inches with a longest side dimension of 26 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere over the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 35 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-24
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Figure 3-24
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 40 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Lava Rock Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 624 square inches with a longest side dimension of 26 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 15 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-25
Nozzle must be located anywhere along the perimeter of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
S
I
Figure 3-25
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 41 Part # 10053
I
IM
)FFUEL
DAL) MUST
EED
S
Chapter 3 - System Design
Natural Charcoal Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Fuel Depth (Charcoal)
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1H
1 (One)
1 (One)
480 square inches with a longest side dimension of 24 inches
Must not exceed 6 inches
Anywhere over the cooking surface.
24 inches to 35 inches above the cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the broiler.
See figure 3-26
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Figure 3-26
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 42 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
0 Natural Charcoal Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Fuel Depth (Charcoal)
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1L
1 (One)
1 (One)
480 square inches with a longest side dimension of 24 inches
Must not exceed 6 inches
Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
15 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the broiler.
See figure 3-27
Nozzle must be located anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.________
S
pj
IF FUEL
)AL) MUST
EED
Figure 3-27
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 43
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Ij
DEPTH
VOOD)
ENCHES
Chapter 3 - System Design
Mesquite Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 480 square inches with a longest side dimension of 24 inches,
Fuel Depth (Wood) Must not exceed 6 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere over the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 35 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-28
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
S
Figure 3-28
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 44 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Mesquite Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 480 square inches with a longest side dimension of 24 inches
Fuel Depth (Wood) Must not exceed 6 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 15 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-29
Nozzle must be located anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.______
It
480 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING
AREA 15" 2W
MAXIMUM DEPTH
OF FUEL (WOOD)
MUST NOT
EXCEED 6 INCHES
LONGEST
SIDE
DIMENSION
Figure 3-29
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 45 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Upright/Salamander Broiler 0
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1L
1 (One)
1 (One)
Internal chamber of 36 inches wide by 28 inches deep.
Above the grate at the front edge of the broiler.
Aimed at the back opposite corner of the broiler chamber, and pointed parallel to the
broiler grate.
See figure 3-30
Nozzle must be located at thefront of the broiler above the grate, pointedparallel to the broiler grate,
and aimed at the diagonally opposite corner
S
Figure 3-30
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 46 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Chain Broiler
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1L
1 (One)
1 (One)
Internal chamber of 27 inches wide by 38 inches deep.
1 t 3 inches above the surface of the chain at the front edge of the broiler.
Aimed at the back opposite corner of the broiler chamber, and pointed parallel to the chain
surface.
See figure 3-31
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area, pointedparallel to the chain surface,
and aimed at the diagonally opposite corner.
S
C
NOZZ
1-3 IN(
CHAI
TO SU
NOZZLE AIMED
AT DIAGONALLY
OPPOSITE
CORNER
Figure 3-31
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 47 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
PIPING LIMITATIONS
Volume Chart
1/4 in. pipe = 20.5 mls./ft.
3/8 in. pipe = 37.5 mls./ft.
1/2 in. pipe = 59.8 mls./ft.
3/4 in. pipe = 105.0 mls./ft.
For more Pipe Volume data, see page 52
TANK CHART
Maximum Maximum Volume
Maximum Pipe Allowed Between
Flow Volume First Nozzle & Last
Tank Size Numbers (milliliters) Nozzle (milliliters)
1.6 Gallon 5 roo 600
Lr600
3.0 Gallon io 1910 1125
L3000
4.6 Gallon 54 3400 3000
L4600
4.6 Gallon 55 2600 200
L4600
6.o Gallon 59 4215 1688/side
L6000
6.o Gallon 20 3465 1313/side
L6000
MINIMUM PIPE VOLUMES FOR A
FRYER, RANGE, AND WOK
Cylinder
Size Entire System At or before appliance
L1600 239 ml—i Flow Pt tic ml—i Flow Pt
L3000 300 ml-4 Flow Pts 239 ml—z Flow Pts
L4600 66o ml—to Flow Pts iSo ml-2 Flow Pts
L6000 960 ml—I4 Flow Pts 520 ml-2 Flow Pts
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Split piping and straight piping are both allowed
on L1600, L3000 and L4600 systems.
L6000 systems must use split piping only, with no
nozzle located before the split, and with a maximum of
14 flow points per side. 1/2 in. minimum piping must be
used up to the first split.
Maximum volume for 1/4 in. pipe between a
nozzle and the preceding tee is 410 mls.
Maximum flow numbers for 1/4 in. pipe is 6.
Maximum number of elbows between a nozzle and
the preceding tee is 5.
Maximum of 25 elbows are allowed in the total
piping system.
Maximum difference in elevation between the tank
outlet and any nozzle is 10 ft.
No traps are allowed in the piping network.
Pipe lengths are measured from center to center of
fittings.
The internal equivalent length volume of fittings
does not have to be considered as part of the total pipe
volume.
When utilizing different size pipe in the system,
the largest size must start first and the additional pipe
must decrease as it approaches the nozzle.
Elbow(s) or swivel adaptors located at the nozzles
do not have to be counted in the 25 elbow maximum
requirement.
13 Reducing bushings are allowed when reducing to a
smaller pipe size.
14. Additional piping requirements when protecting a
range, wok, or a fryer:
L1600 - Minimum of 239 ml and one (1) flow
numbers required in total system. Of that
minimum, 180 ml and one (1) flow numbers must
be utilized at or before the range, wok, or fryer
L3000 - Minimum of 300 ml and four (4) flow
numbers required in total system. Of that
minimum, 239 ml and two (2) flow numbers must
be utilized at or before the range, wok, or fryer.
L4600 - Minimum of 660 ml and ten (10) flow
numbers required in total system. Of that
minimum, 180 ml and two (2) flow numbers must
be utilized at or before the range, wok, or fryer.
L6000 - Minimum of 960 ml and fourteen (14)
flow numbers required in total system. Of that
minimum, 120 ml and 2 flow numbers must be
utilized at or before the range, wok, or fryer.
Once the nozzle placement and quantity of tanks has been
determined, it is necessary to determine the piping configurations
between the tank and the nozzles. This section contains the
guidelines and limitations for designing the distribution piping so
that the wet chemical agent will discharge from the nozzles at a
proper flow rate. These limitations must also be referred to when
selecting the mounting location for the tanks.
The maximum pipe lengths are based on internal pipe volume.
Each size tank is allowed a minimum and maximum total volume
of piping, calculated in milliliters.
There is no need to distinguish between what portion of the
piping is supply line and what portion is branch line. Only the
total volume of the complete piping network has to be considered.
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 Page rev. C 48 Part # 10053
EXAMPLE
The cooking area that requires protection consists of a single 48
in. perimeter exhaust duct, a 10 ft. long "V" bank plenum, (2) 18
in. wide x 24 in. fryers, a 30 in. x 36 in. wide griddle, and a 24 in.
diameter wok. See Figure 3-33.
12' 12"
10
Figure 3-33
Step No. 1: Determine number of flow points required.
48 in. perimeter duct requires one one-flow nozzle
10 ft. "V" bank hood requires one one-flow nozzle
18 in. x 24 in. fryer requires one two-flow nozzle
18 in. x 24 in. fryer requires one two-flow nozzle
30 in. x 36 in. griddle requires one one-flow nozzle
24 in. diameter wok requires one one flow-nozzle
TOTAL FLOW NUMBERS -8
Step No. 2: Determine size and quantity of tanks required.
Referring to the chart in "General Piping
Requirements," an L3000 and an L4600 can supply
10 flows, therefore, an L3000 can be used.
(2) 18 IN. X 24 IN. FRYERS
(1)30 N. X 36 N. GRIDDLE
24 IN. DIAMETER WOK
Chapter 3 —System Design . )
SUPPLY PIPE
MUST ENTER BULL
SIDE OF TEE
SPLIT PIPING
(3TIGHT PIPING
Figure 3-32
DESIGN STEPS -
Step No. 1 Determine number Of --low Fo-nts required based
on duct size, plenum size and type, and size- of all
appliances.
S tep No. 2 Determine size and quantity cf tanks required. Refer
to the chart in "General Piping Requirements" to
determine the maximum amount of flcw numbers
allowed per each tank size.
Step No. 3Layout nozzles, piping diagram, and tank iccation.
Determine pipe lengths as accurate as possible. Make
certain maximum number of elbows is not exceeded.
Note: Tanks cannot be manifolded together. Each
tank must have a separate piping network.
Step No. 4 Add all the lengths of each pi-)e run and multiply by
the mls./ft. listed in the Volur:ie Chart. If the sum
falls within the acceptable range noted in general
Piping Requirements, that pipe size is acceptabie.
If the calculated volume is toc large, recalcilate
the volume using the ml per foot of a smaller pipe
size. Pipe sizes can be mixed but Rule No. 11 of the
General Piping Requirements must be followed.
Step No. 5 Check to make certain minimum volumes, maximum
volumes and maximum volune allowed between first
nozzle and last nozzle is not exceeded (Tan Ciart).
Check each rule in "General Piping Requirement"
to make certain none iave been exceeded. If any
requirement is exceeded, charge to a different pipe
size and recalculate.
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
- Page rev. C
49 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Step No. 3 Make an accurate sketch of the cooking lineup and
the hood. Sketch in the tank location and all the
piping required for the total system. Make certain all
pipe lengths and number of elbows are as accura:e as
possible. Check the "General Piping Requirements"
to determine that the minimum and maximum
requirements are met. See Figure 3-34.
1
2
6 62 2
Figure 3-34
Step No. 4: Total all pipe lengths. Refer to the Volume Chart.
Chose a given pipe size and multiply the ml per foot
by the total length of all the pipe. If the sum falls
within the acceptable range noted in Tank Chart, that
pipe size is acceptable. If the calculated volume is too
large, recalculate the volume using the ml per foot of a
smaller pipe size. See Figure 3-35
Add section A-B = 0-6" + 5+ 14+ 2'+ 0-6" = 22' Add
section B-C = 1-6"
Add section C-D = 1'
Add section D-E = 2'
Add section E-F = 0-6"
Add section F-L = 3' + 2 + 2" = 7'
Add section B-G = 0-6"
Add section C-H = 2'+ 2'= 4'
Add section D-I = 2'+ 2'= 4'
Add section E-J = 0-6' + 0-6" = 1'
Add section F-K = 2' + 2' = 4'
Total length of all pipe = 47-6"
Refer to Volume Chart. The pipe size chosen is 3/8
inch. The volume per foot of 3/8 in. pipe is 37.5 ml.
Multiply 37.5 by the total pipe length of 47.5 ft. 37.5
ml x 47.5 ft. = 1781 ml total volume
The maximum volume allowed for an L3000 is 1910
ml, therefore, 3/8 in. pipe is acceptable for this system.
Bj~ D 2- 2
2'
C L
K
S
A
5-
14' I 2-
Figure 3-35
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 50 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 —System Design
S tep No. 5 Check to make certain minimum volumes and does not have to be considered as part of the total
maximum volume allowed between first nozzle and pipe volume. (Example system OK)
last nozzle are not exceeded (Tank Chart). Check 11.When utilizing different size pipe in the total
each rule in "General Piping Requirements" to make system, the largest size must start first and the
certain none have been exceeded. If any requirement additional pipe must decrease as it approaches the
is exceeded, change to a different pipe size and nozzle. (Example system N/A)
recalculate. See Figure -36. Elbow(s) or swivel adaptors located at the nozzles
Refer to Tank Chart, page 48. do not have to be counted in the 25 elbow
maximum requirement. (Example system OK)
Minimum Pipe Volume for L3000 is 300 milliliters Additional piping requirements when protecting a
protecting a fryer, wok, or range (Example system pipe range, wok, or a fryer:
volume is 1781 milliliters, therefore OK) L1600: Minimum of 239 ml and one (1)
flow numbers required in total system. Of
Maximum Pipe Volume for L3000 is 1910 milliliters that minimum, 180 ml and one (1) flow
(Example system pipe volume is 1781 milliliters, therefore numbers must be utilized at or before the
OK) range, wok, or fryer
L3000: Minimum of 300 ml and four (4)
Maximum Volume Allowed Between First Nozzle and flow numbers required in total system. Of
Last Nozzle for L3000 is 1125 milliliters (Example that minimum, 239 ml and two (2) flow
system, the amount 0f3/8 in. piping between G and L, is numbers must be utilized at or before the
25.5feet. 25.5feet x 37.5 mIs/ft. = 956.3 ml, therefore, range, wok, or fryer. (Example system has
OK) 1781 ml and 10 flow numbers, therefore, OK
The example system has 1050 ml and 3 flows
Refer to General Piping Requirements, page 48. before the fryer, therefore, OK)
S i. Split piping and straight piping are both allowed on L4600: Minimum of 660 ml and ten (10)
L3000 and L4600 systems. (Example system OK) flow numbers required in total system. Of
L6000 systems must use split piping only, with that minimum, 180 ml and two (2) flow
no nozzle located before the split, and with a numbers must be utilized at or before the
maximum of 14 flow points per side. 1/2 in. range, wok, or fryer.
minimum piping must be used up to the first split. L6000: Minimum of 960 ml and fourteen
(Example system N/A) (14) flow numbers required in total system.
Maximum volume for 1/4 in. pipe between a nozzle Of that minimum, 120 ml and 2 flow
and the preceding tee is 410 mls. (Example system numbers must be utilized at or before the
N/A) range, wok, or fryer.
Maximum flow numbers for 1/4 in. pipe is 6.
(Example system N/A) GEN. PIPING
Maximum number of elbows between a nozzle RULE NO. 1, 8, 9
and the preceding tee is 5. (Example system has a
GEN. PIPING
TANK CHART RULE NO.5
maximum number 0f2, therefore, OK) MINIMUMIMAXIMUM
PIPE VOLUME 1,NK CHART
Maximum of 25 elbows are allowed in the total MAX. VOL
GEN. BETWEEN
piping system. (Example system has 11 elbows, PIPING FIRSTAND
LAST NOZZLE
therefore, OK) RULE
NO. 10 TANK CHART GEN. PIPING
Maximum difference in elevation between the tank MAX. VOL. RULE NO. 12
GEN. BETWEEN FIRST
outlet and any nozzle, or the tank outlet and the PIPING AND LAST NOZZL
highest or lowest horizontal pipe run, is 10 ft.
RULE C NO.7 GEN. PIPING C C
(Example system has 5'-6", therefore, OK) RULE NO.6 0
No traps are allowed in the piping network. I
S 9.
(Example system has no traps, therefore, OK)
Pipe lengths are measured from center to center of
GEN. PIPING
RULE NO. 13
fittings. (Example system pipe lengths were measured
from center to center offittings, therefore, OK) Figure 3-36
10. The internal equivalent length volume of fittings
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 51 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
DETECTOR PLACEMENT
Detectors are required over cooking appliances and in the duct(s)
of protected ventilation hoods. Detectors shall be located in the
plenum area of the ventilation hood.
EXHAUST DUCT(S).
Each exhaust duct must have at least one (1) detector installed in
the duct entrance, located in the air stream of the cooking vapors
at a maximum of 12 feet into the duct, centered. See Figure 3-37.
COOKING APPLIANCE(S).
Each cooking appliance with a continuous cooking surface
not exceeding 48" x 48" shall be protected by one (1) detector.
Cooking appliances with a continuous cooking surface exceeding
48" x 48" shall be protected by one (1) detector per 48" x 48"
cooking area. Detectors used for cooking appliances must be
located within the perimeter of the protected appliance toward the
exhaust duct side of the appliance. The detector should be located
in the air stream of the appliance to enhance system response
time.
If a cooking appliance is located under a duct opening where
a detector has been mounted, it is not necessary to utilize an
additional detector provided the duct detector is not more than
12" into the duct opening. If two (2) appliances are located
under a duct opening where a detector has been mounted, it is
not necessary to utilize an additional detector provided the duct
detector is not more than 12" into the duct opening. See Figure
3-37.
IAPPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE I COVERED COVERED COVERED COVERED
BY BY BY BY
DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR
A B B C
A _____ _____(i c
Figure 3-37: Proper Detector Placement
PIPE VOLUMES CONVERSION CHART
1/4" = 20.5 ml per ft. 3/8" = 37.5 ml per ft. i/z = 59.8 ml per ft. 3/4" = 105 ml per ft.
Total Pipe From First Nozzle to Last Nozzle Total First I Maximum Pipe Length Maximum Pipe Length Cylinder Flow Pipe Nozzle to
Size Points Volume Last Nozzle ¼" /8" ½" I 3/4" 1/4" 3/s" ½"
L1600 5 ioo 600 73.10 ft 40.00 ft 25.00 ft i 29.20 ft - 16.00 ft io.00 ft
L3000 10 1910 1125 93.17 ft f 50.93 ft 31.94 ft 18.19 ft 54.88 ft 30.00 ft J 18.81 ft 10.71 ft
L4600 14 3400 3000 16.8 ft i 90.67 ft 56.86 ft 32.38 ft 146.34 ft 80.00 ft 50.17 ft 28.57 ft
L4600 15 2600 2000 126.83 ft 69.33 ft 43.48 ft f 24.76 ft 97.56 ft ft ft J 19.05 ft
L6000 19 4215 1688/side 20.6i ft I 112.40 ft 70.48 ft 40.14 ft 82.34 ft 45.01 ft 28.23 ft 16.o8 ft
L6000 20 3465 1312.5/side 16.02 ft 92.40 ft 57.4 ft _L3° ft 64.02 ft 35.00 ft f 21.95 ft { 12.50 ft
Pipe I Pipe Size/ml
length/ft j ¼' ½" I ½" j 3/4"
I 20.5 37.5 59.8 105
2 41 75 1119.6 1210
3 61.5 112.5 179.4 315
4 82 15 239.2 1420
5
6
102.5
f123
187.5
1225
299
1358.8
525
1630
7
8
143.5
1164
262.5
1300
418.6
1.4784
735
1840
9 184.5 337.5 538.2 945
10 1205 [375 1598 Tios_
Pipe I Pipe Size/ml
length/ft 1/a" J 3/s" ½" 1 '/4"
II
12 -
225.5
1246
412.5
1450
657.8
1717.6
,,ç
f1260
'3 266. 487.5 777.4 1365
4.. I7. 1525 1837.2 11470
15
.16
307.5
1328
562.5
1600
897
1956.8
1575
11680
,I7 348.5 637.5 ,o,6.6 1785
.18 1369 1675 11076.4 11890
19 389.5 712.5 1136.2 1995
20 1410 1750 11196 2100
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 52 Part # 10053
The cylinder must be mounted vertically. The L1600, L3000
and L4600 cylinders must be mounted using a MB15 Mounting
Bracket Kit. The L6000 cylinder must be mounted using a MB1
Mounting Bracket Kit.
The bracket must be securely anchored to the wall using bolts
or lag screws. The wall to which the bracket is attached must be
sufficiently strong to support the cylinder. The bracket should
never be fastened to dry wall or similar material. If this type
of wall is encountered, studs must be located and the bracket
fastened to them. See Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1. Cylinder and Mounting Bracket Installation.
CONTROL HEAD INSTALLATION
1. SINGLE CYLINDER INSTALLATIONS.
For single cylinder system installations the MCH2 Control
Head can be installed directly onto the cylinder valve. When the
control head is properly aligned in the desired position, tighten the
knurled locking ring to secure the assembly. See Figure 4-2.
Chapter 4 - Installation
CHAPTER IV
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
GENERAL
This chapter will detail the basic information necessary for
proper installation of the Protex Series II Restaurant Fire
Suppression System. However, before attempting any installation
it is necessary to attend a Factory Certification Training Class
and become Certified to install the Protex Series II Restaurant
Fire Suppression System. Because it is difficult to completely
understand every aspect of an intricate pre-engineered system
simply by reading the Technical Manual, Heiser Logistics will not
be responsible for system installations or maintenance performed
by any non-Certified person(s).
Pipe and fittings for the discharge piping, conduit (EMT), pipe
straps, pipe hangers, mounting bolts, and other miscellaneous
equipment are not furnished as part of the Protex Series II
Restaurant Fire Suppression System. These items must be
furnished by the installer.
Before attempting any installation, unpack the entire system
and check that all necessary parts are on hand. Inspect parts for
damage. Verify that cylinder pressure is within the acceptable
range as shown on the gauge.
*CYLINDER INSTALLATION
The cylinder and valve assembly is shipped with an anti-recoil
plug in the valve discharge port.
It CAUTION /
The anti-recoil plug must remain in the valve discharge port
until the discharge piping is connected to the valve.
KNURLED LOCKING RING
ANTI-RECOIL PLUG
Figure 4-2: Single Cylinder Installation Using MCH2 Control Head.
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 53
Page rev. C
Part# 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
S 2. MULTIPLE CYLINDER INSTALLATIONS.
A. Multiple Cylinder Actuation Using MCH2 Control Head.
The MCH2 Control Head can be used to pneumatically actuate
a maximum of three (3) agent cylinders. When a control head is
used for multiple cylinder actuation, it cannot be mounted directly
onto a cylinder valve. The control head must be installed remotely
using an MBP2 Control Head Mounting Bracket. The bracket
must be anchored to the wall using bolts or lag screws.
In order to actuate the agent cylinder(s) from a control head,
a 1/4 NPT x 450 1/4" flare type fitting (conforming to SAE
J513c) must be screwed into the base of the control head actuator.
Pneumatic tubing is then used to connect the control head to the
valve cap assembly of each agent cylinder valve. See Figure 4-3.
NOTE
Pneumatic tubing used for remote cylinder actuation shall
have an outside diameter of 1/4' with a minimum wall
thickness of 1/32". This is commonly known as refrigeration-
type copper tubing. All tubing fittings shall be of the 1/4",
450 flare type conforming to SAE J513c.
Compression type fittings are not acceptable.
A single MCH2 Control Head can actuate three (3) agent
cylinders with a cumulative maximum of eight (8) feet of
pneumatic tubing.
B. Multiple Cylinder Actuation Using Model PAC100
Pneumatic Actuation Cylinder.
The PAC100 Pneumatic Actuation Cylinder must be used if more
than three (3) agent cylinders require simultaneous actuation.
The PAC100 must be used in conjunction with an MCH2
Control Head. The control head is mounted on the PAC100 valve
assembly.
The PAC100 is shipped complete with a mounting bracket. The
cylinder must be mounted vertically with the nameplate facing
out. The bracket must be securely anchored to the wall using bolts
or lag screws. The wall to which the bracket is attached must be
sufficiently strong to support the pneumatic cylinder. The bracket
should never be fastened to dry wall or similar material. If this
type of wall is encountered, studs must be located and the bracket
fastened to them. See Figure 4-4.
MCH2 CONTROL HEAD
a .
PjoTexll
1/4" OD COPPER TUBING
96" MAX TOTAL FOR 3 CYLINDER ACTUATIONf
1/4NPT x 450 1/4"
FLARE TYPE
(sAEJ5I3C)
45'1/4" FLARED
TUBING NUT
L
Figure 4-3: Multiple Cylinder Actuation Using an MCH2 Control Head.
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 54 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
STRAP
NOTE
Pneumatic tubing used for remote cylinder actuation shall
have an outside diameter of 1/4" with a minimum wall
thickness of 1/32'. This is commonly known as refrigeration-
type copper tubing. All tubing fittings shall be of the 1/4",
450 flare type conforming to SAE J513c.
Compression type fittings are not acceptable.
The PAC100 pneumatic cylinder can actuate a maximum often
BRACKET (10) agent cylinders with a cumulative maximum of 100 feet of
pneumatic tubing.
S
CONTROL
P11
Figure 4-4. PAC100 Pneumatic Cylinder Installation.
In order to actuate the agent cylinders from a PAC100 Pneumatic
Actuation Cylinder, a 3/4" NPT x 1/4' NPT bushing must be
screwed into the pneumatic cylinder's discharge port. A 1/4" NPT
x 450 1/4" flare type fitting (conforming to SAEJ513c) must then
be screwed into this bushing. Pneumatic tubing is then used to
connect the PAC100 pneumatic cylinder to the valve cap assembly
of each agent cylinder valve. See Figure 4-5.
MCH2 CONTROL HEAD
Xli 1/4' OD COPPER z We
1/4NPTx450 1/4"
-FLARE TYPE
FITTING
(SAEJ513C)
1/4 NPT
3/40 NPT
BUSHING
PAC100
CYLINDER
45 FLARED
TUBING NUT
1/4.1/4.1/4 45* FLARE TEE
(TYPICAL)
ttTOEMAINING CYLINDERS
10-17411
Figure 4-5: Multiple Cylinder Actuation Using an MCH2 Control Head.
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 55 Part # 10053
S
7/
FUSIBLE LIN
Figure 4-7: Series Link Installation
1/2" EMT CONNECTOR (P/N 800)
CABLE CRIMP (P/N 310S)
..- 1/16" STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
Chapter 4 - Installation
FUSIBLE LINK DETECTOR
INSTALLATION
Fusible links are always used in conjunction with the MCH2
Mechanical Control Head. After mounting the cylinder and
control head, the fusible link line can be installed. The first
step to installing the fusible link line is to install the detector
bracket(s). These brackets must be installed in the plenum area
of the ventilation hood over all protected appliances and in each
duct. See Chapter III for detector placement guidelines.
Note: Only ML-style Fusible Links can be used.
Connect the fusible link brackets together using 1/2 conduit and
the conduit connectors supplied in the detector kit (P/N 210SH).
A Protex Series II corner pulley must be used whenever a change
in conduit direction is necessary. The conduit is connected to the
control head through a knockout in the upper left-side corner.
In general, fusible links centered in the detector brackets are
connected in series using 1/16" diameter stainless steel cable. The
spring plate in the control head maintains tension on this series of
fusible links. If the tension is released for any reason (i.e., a fusible
link separates), the control head will operate and actuate the
system. Maximum limitations for the fusible link detection line
are as follows
Fusible Link Line Limitations When Used with the MCH2
Control Head and 90KBS and 90SB Pulleys
Maximum # of detectors: 20
Maximum length of cable: 150 feet
Maximum # of pulleys: 40
Fusible links can be installed with or without fusible link hangers
(see Chapter II for description).
1. FUSIBLE LINK INSTALLATION WITHOUT
HANGERS.
Begin installing links at the terminal bracket. The link is
connected to the far side of the terminal bracket using an "5"
hook. The "S' hook must be crimped closed after the link is
installed. A tight loop is then made in the cable and secured
by the crimp provided. This loop is connected to the other side
of the terminal link (see Figure 4-6) and the cable fed through
the conduit to the next bracket. The cable proceeding from the
terminal link will be used to connect the series links (see Figure
4-7). Series links must be centered in their detector brackets.
After the last link in the series is connected, the cable should be
fed through the conduit back to the control head. Thread the
cable through the hole in the fusible link ratchet wheel. The line
must then be crimped, and the crimp positioned inside the center
of the ratchet wheel.
LINK DETECTOR BRACKET (P/N 349)
S-HOOK (P/N 341S)
Figure 4-6: Terminal Link Installation
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 56 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
NOTE
Crimps must always be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
lengths. Loops are the accepted method of connecting the
cable to mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used on a single cable.
The fusible link line can now be put into a set position by applying
tension to the fusible link line. This is accomplished by using a
½" hex wrench on the fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratchet
wheel will be ratcheted in a clockwise direction until the spring
plate makes contact with the top of the control head box. The
fusible link line is now in a set position. See Figure 4-8.
FUSIBLE
LINK LII
FUSIBLE
LINK
RATCHE
WHEEL
Figure 4-8: Fusible Link Line Termination.
2. FUSIBLE LINK INSTALLATION USING FLH25
Q'g
FUSIBLE LINK HANGERS.
inning at the control head, feed the stainless steel cable
through the conduit and brackets to the terminal bracket in one
continuous length. Allow approximately two and one-half (2.5)
inches of slack at each bracket for the installation of the Fusible
Link Hangers. At the terminal link, a tight loop is made in the
cable and secured by the crimp provided. The cable is attached
to the far side of the terminal bracket using an "5" hook. The
"5" hook must be crimped closed after the cable is installed. See
Figure 4-9.
CRIMP
APPROX. 21h" SLACK
"S"HOOK
Figure 4-10: Fusible Link Connection.
Hook the bottom of the link onto the bottom leg of the hanger.
See Figure 4-11.
Figure 4-11: Fusible Link/Hanger Connection.
Center the hanger/link in the fusible link bracket by sliding it
along the link line. This is easily accomplished before any tension
is applied to the link line. Repeat this procedure for all fusible
links.
After the last hanger/link in the series is connected, the cable
should be fed through the hole in the fusible link ratchet wheel.
The line must then be crimped, and the crimp positioned inside
the center of the ratchet wheel.
NOTE
Crimps must always be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
lengths. Loops are the accepted method of connecting the
cable to mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used on a single cable.
Figure 4.9: Terminal Bracket Connection.
Begin installing the Fusible Link Hangers at the terminal bracket
and work toward the control head. Loop the cable through the
oval opening in the hanger and hook the fusible link on the loop.
See Figure 4-10. 0-te: Only ML-style Fusible Links can be used.
The fusible link line can now be put into a set position by applying
tension to the fusible link line. This is accomplished by using a
½' hex wrench on the fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratchet
wheel will be ratcheted in a clockwise direction until the spring
plate makes contact with the top of the control head box. The
fusible link line is now in a set position. See Figure 4-8.
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 : 57 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
Check to ensure that the fusible link hanger(s) remain centered in
the bracket after the fusible link line is set. See Figure 4-12.
NOTE
If wire rope requires splicing, a splice is to be a minimum
of 12 in. from any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid
interference.
SETTING THE CONTROL HEAD
1. MCH2 MECHANICAL CONTROL HEAD.
Once the fusible link line is set, the control head can be placed in
the set position. To set the control head, the slide plate is moved
from right to left, ensuring the bolt extending from the cam arm
is in the slot provided in the slide plate. Continue moving the slide
plate to the left until the latching arm is in the locked position.
Insert the pull pin into the hole in the slide plate above the
latching arm. This will lock the control head in the set position,
eliminating accidental actuation during the rest of the installation
procedure. See Figure 4-13.
CAM ARM
Figure 4-13: Control Head In Set Position.
2. RESET RELAY
A UL Listed reset relay is required whenever an electrical gas
shut-off valve is used in conjunction with the Protex Series II
Restaurant Fire Suppression System.
REMOTE PULL STATION
INSTALLATION
The RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station is used for remote
mechanical actuation of all system releasing devices. It is to be
located near an exit in the path of egress from the hazard area no
more than 48 inches and no less than 42 inches above the floor.
FUSIBLE LINK
BRACKET
(SOLD SEPARATEI
Figure 4-12: Fusible Link/Hanger In Set Position.
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 58 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
NOTE
An RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station must be used for
manual activation of an MCH2 releasing device.
The Pull Station can be surface mounted or flush mounted. For
flush mounting a RACO #232 4" deep electrical box or equivalent
must be used (dealer supplied). It is connected to the releasing
device using 1/16" diameter stainless steel cable. The cable enters
the pull station box through the center hole in the bottom, top,
either side, or the center back hole. The cable enters the control
head through the t op-center knockout. The cable must be
enclosed in 1/2' conduit with a Protex Series II corner pulley at
each change in conduit direction. Maximum limitations for the
RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station are as follows:
RPSM Cable Run Limitations When Used with an MCH2
Control Head and 90KBS and 90SB Pulleys
Maximum length of cable: 150 feet
Maximum # of pulleys (1/16"): 40
After mounting the pull station box and conduit, feed the stainless
steel cable from the releasing device, through the conduit, and into Oe pull station box. Feed the cable through the bushing. Insert
e cable into the pull handle and secure it by tightening the screw
with a 3/32" allen wrench (see Figure 4-14).
NOTE
Crimps must always be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
lengths. Loops are the accepted method of connecting the
cable to mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used on a single cable.
Pull the pull handle until the crimp touches the latching arm. See
Figure 4-15. Coil the excess cable in the pull box and attach the
cover plate with the four screws provided. Insert the pull handle
into the cover plate and insert the pull pin
PULL STATION PULL STATION
Figure 4-15: RPSM Remote Pull Station Connection
PULL STATION PIN
CONNECTION
PULL
HANDLE CASE OF
ITF
PULL STATION
'4.
TO ACTUATE IN co, $a OF
SPSsSv5tM
NNW
'I
Figure 4-14: RPSM Remote Pull Station Installation.
Cut and thread the cable through the hole in the latching arm
of the control head and pull the cable tight. Crimp the cable
approximately ten to twelve inches below the latching arm. Note:
NFPA-17A requires the pull length to be no more
*an 14 in.
0
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 59
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
GAS SHUT OFF VALVE INSTALLATION
1. MECHANICAL GAS SHUT-OFF VALVE
INSTALLATION.
The MCH2 Control Head is used to operate the mechanical gas
shut-off valve. This valve is located in the fuel gas supply line
to the cooking appliance(s). The valve body has an arrow which
indicates direction of gas flow through the valve. The gas shut-off
valve is spring loaded and requires five pounds of force to hold
it open. This force is supplied by a 1/16" diameter stainless steel
cable that is connected to the control head.
After the valve is installed in the gas line, 1/2" conduit must be
run from the top center knockout of the gas valve box to the lower
right-hand knockout in the control head. A Protex Series TI corner
pulley is used wherever a change in conduit direction is required.
Gas Valve Cable Run Limitations When Used with an
MCH2 Control Head and 90KBS and 90SB Pulleys
Maximum length of cable (1/16"): 100 feet
Maximum # of pulleys: 30
Remove the gas valve cover and thread the stainless steel cable
through the conduit back to the control head. Thread the cable
through the hole in the gas valve ratchet wheel. The line must
then be crimped, and the crimp positioned inside the center of the
ratchet wheel.
NOTE
Crimps must always be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
lengths. Loops are the accepted method of connecting the
cable to mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used on a single cable.
At the gas valve, loop the cable through the valve stem and secure
it with the crimp provided (see Figure 4-16).
Figure 4-16: Gas Valve Installation.
½" EMT
CONNECTOR —*t
/ CAUTION
Do not overtighten gas valve. Overtightening the gas valve
may cause the valve to not close completely, thus not fully
shutting the fuel supply off to the appliance.
The gas valve line can now be put into a set position by applying
tension to the gas valve line. This is accomplished by using a ½"
hex wrench on the gas valve ratchet wheel. The ratchet wheel will
be ratcheted in a clockwise direction until the gas valve is fully
open. See the Instruction Sheet included in gas valve shipping
assembly, for detailed information. Secure the gas valve cover plate
to the gas valve box with the four (4) screws provided. The gas
valve line is now in a set position. See Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17: Gas Valve Line Termination.
2. ELECTRICAL GAS SHUT-OFF VALVE
INSTALLATION.
The MCH2 Control Head is used to operate the electrical gas
shut-off valve. This valve is located in the fuel gas supply line
to the cooking appliance(s). The valve body has an arrow which
indicates direction of gas flow through the valve. A reset relay
must always be used with an electrical gas shut-off valve.
GAS VALVE
CABLE
RELEASE
CONNECTION
CONTROL ) VALVE BODY
BOX
UNION / UNION
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 60 Part # 10053
Figure 4-20. Electrical Switch Installation in
MCH2 Control Head.
NOTE
No electrical connections shall be made inside the control
head. All electrical wiring shall exit the control head through
the knockout on the side of the box. All electrical connections
must be made in an approved electrical box.
These switches may be used to provide an electrical signal to the
main breaker and/or operate electrical accessories such as electrical
contactors for power shut-down of electrical appliances, provided
the rating of the switch is not exceeded. Wiring connections are
shown in Figure 4-21. The contact ratings for the switch is as
follows:
Contact Ratings For Electrical Switches
21 amps 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or
2 HP, 250,277 VAC
BLACK
J....
RED
BROWN
Figure 4-21. Wiring Diagram for
MSSPDT2 Electrical Switch.
Chapter 4 - Installation
EE PULLEY INSTALLATION
The 1513 Tee Pulley is used to connect two (2) mechanical gas
valves or two (2) remote mechanical pull stations to a single
control head. The cable proceeding from the control head must
always enter the branch of the tee pulley. See Figure 4-18.
A tee pulley that is used to close two (2) gas valves can only be
used to close gas valves with similar stem travel. Gas valves from
3/4" up to 1-1/2" can be used on the same tee pulley. A 2" gas
valve can be used only with another 2" gas valve. Gas valves from
2-1/2" up to 3" can be used on the same tee pulley. As an example,
using a 3/4" gas valve with a 3" gas valve will not allow the 3"
valve to fully open.
CAUTION ifs
The tee pulley must never be used to connect multiple fusible
link lines to a single control head.
S
Figure 4-18: Tee Pulley Installation.
ELECTRICAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
The MSSPDT2, MSDPDT2, MS3PDT2, or MS4PDT2
Electrical Switch is available for use where transferable switch
contacts are required upon activation of the extinguishing system.
See Figure 4-19. These switches can be field installed in the
control head. See Figure 4-20 and refer to the Instruction Sheet
included with switch shipping assembly, for detailed mounting
instructions.
S
Figure 4-19: Electrical Switch (P/N MSSPDT2)
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 61 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
PIPE AND NOZZLE INSTALLATION
All pipe ends shall be thoroughly reamed after cutting and all oil
and foreign matter removed from the pipe. It is recommended that
the following procedures be followed:
Use Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel
pipe and fittings. Do not use hot-dipped galvanized iron pipe or
fittings in the agent distribution piping.
Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends
are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside
of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt.
The distribution piping and fitting connections, located in
the hood or the protected area, must be sealed with pipe tape.
When applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread and
wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the
threads, away from the pipe opening.
Do not over-tighten, but be sure the pipe is snug. Do not back-
off sections of pipe to make them fit better. If the pipe was cut
too short, re-cut another pipe to the proper length.
L CAUTION JS
Do not apply Teflon tape to cover or overlap the pipe opening,
as the pipe and nozzles could become blocked and prevent the
proper flow of agent.
Do not use thread sealant or pipe joint compound.
All piping shall be securely fastened by means of pipe hangers
and/or pipe straps. A union should be installed in the discharge
piping, as close to the cylinder valve as possible, to permit
disconnection and removal for inspection and service. Dry air or
nitrogen should be blown through the discharge piping to remove
chips and other debris prior to installation of nozzles.
Nozzles shall be installed in accordance with the limitations
described in Chapter III of this manual. Blow-off caps are
provided for each nozzle. These will prevent dirt and grease from
clogging the nozzle.
SYSTEM CHECKOUT AFTER
INSTALLATION
1. MCH2 MECHANICAL CONTROL HEAD.
To check satisfactory operation of the control head, cut the
terminal link or the "S" hook holding the link. This will relieve
all tension on the fusible link line and operate the control head.
The slide plate will have moved fully to the right. The gas valve
cable will have been released, causing the gas valve to close. Any
auxiliary equipment connected to the dry contacts of the solenoid
monitor and/or the Micro Switch in the control head will have
operated.
If any of these events fail to occur, the problem must be
investigated and repaired.
Repair the terminal link and put the fusible link line back into the
set position. This is accomplished by using a ½ hex wrench on the
fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratchet wheel will be ratcheted
in a clockwise direction until the spring plate makes contact with
the top of the control head box.
Once the fusible link line is set (note: Refer to page 56 through
56 for fusible link installation details), the control head can be
placed in the set position. To set the control head, the slide plate
is moved from right to left, ensuring the bolt extending from
the cam arm is in the slot provided in the slide plate. Continue
moving the slide plate to the left until the latching arm is in the
locked position.
Once the control head is set, pull the pull handle on the remote
pull station to assure that the control head operates. If the control
head operates normally, the control head can be reset as described
above. Insert the pull pin into the hole in the slide plate above the
latching arm. Replace the pull station handle, pull pin, and nylon
tie.
Assure that the gas valve is fully open by ratcheting the gas valve
ratchet wheel
CAUTION
Before screwing the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge into
the actuator, ensure that the actuator has a Teflon 0-ring
installed.
Using a felt-tipped marker, write the date of installation in the
gray area of the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge. Screw the cartridge
into the control head actuator until hand-tight. Never use a
wrench to tighten the cartridge into the actuator.
Before putting the system into service, all components must be
checked for proper operation. During this checkout, assure that
the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge is not installed in the control
head actuator. Remove the pull pin from the hole in the slide
plate.
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
Remove the pull pin from the hole in the slide plate and install the
control head cover. Insert the pull pin through the local manual
control handle and into the bushing. Secure the pull pin with the
nylon tie provided.
0
Page rev. C
62 Part # 10053
FUSIBLE LINK TO REMOTE FUSIBLE LINK
PULLEY PULL STATION RATCHET WHEEL
Chapter 4 - Installation
NCLOSURE INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
(P/N ENMCU2) AND (P/N ENS)
MOUNTING
The ENMCU2 and/or ENS Enclosures must be securely
Connect the fusible link brackets together using 1/2 EMT
conduit and the conduit connectors supplied in the detector
kit (P/N 210SH). Protex Series TI corner pulleys must be used
whenever a change in conduit direction is necessary. The conduit
is connected to the enclosure through a top knockout.
anchored to the wall using bolts or lag screws. The wall to See Fusible Link Detector Installation Section of this chapter
which the enclosure is attached must be sufficiently strong. The (starting on
enclosure should never be fastened to dry wall or similar material.
If this type of wall is encountered, studs must be located and the
enclosure fastened to them.
Three (3) center mounting holes allow either enclosure to be
mounted on a single stud. Four (4) corner mounting holes are also
available. See Figure 4-22.
FUSIBLE LINK DETECTOR
INSTALLATION
The ENMCU2 Enclosure can support a fusible link detection
system. The ENS Enclosure cannot support a fusible link
detection system and must be used in conjunction with the
ENMCU2 Enclosure or an MCH2 Control Head.
After mounting the enclosure, the fusible link line can be
4 0in
nstalled. The first step to installing the fusible link line is to
nstall the detector brackets. These brackets must be installed
the plenum area of the ventilation hood over all protected
appliances and in each duct. See Chapter III for detector
placement guidelines.
TO REMOTE
MANUAL PULL STATION
TO FUSIBLE
TO ADDITIONAL
CYLINDERS
TO GAS VALVE
SHUTOFF
TO
ADDITIONAL
CYLINDERS
'OPTIONAL
ELECTRICAL
SWITCH
CONNECTION
MASTER ENCLOSURE SLAVE ENCLOSURE
ENMCU2 ENS
S
Figure 4-22: ENMCU2 and ENS Enclosures.
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 63 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
SETTING THE ENMCU2
After the last link in the series is connected, the cable should be
fed through the conduit back to the ENMCU2. It must be fed
under the fusible link line pulley and through the hole in the
fusible link ratchet wheel. The line must then be crimped, and the
crimp positioned inside the ratchet wheel.
NOTE
Crimps must always be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
lengths. Loops are the accepted method of connecting the
cable to mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used on a single cable.
The fusible link line can now be put into a set position by
tensioning the fusible link line. This is accomplished by using a
1/2" hex wrench on the fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratchet
wheel will be ratcheted in a clockwise direction until the spring
plate is parallel to the top of the enclosure. The fusible link line is
now in a set position.
Once the fusible link line is set, the ENMCU2 Enclosure can be
placed in the set position. To set the ENMCU2, the slide plate
is moved from right to left, ensuring the bolt extending from
the cam arm is in the slot provided in the slide plate. Continue
moving the slide plate to the left until the latching arm is in the
locked position. Insert the pull pin into the hole in the slide plate
above the latching arm. This will lock the control mechanism in
the set position, eliminating accidental actuation during the rest of
the installation procedure. See Figure 4-23.
REMOTE PULL STATION
INSTALLATION
The RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station is used for remote
manual actuation of the ENMCU2 It is to be located near an exit
in the path of egress from the hazard area no more than 48 inches
nor less than 42 inches above the floor.
The Pull Station is connected to the ENMCU2 using 1/16"
diameter stainless steel cable. The cable enters the ENMCU2
Enclosure through a knockout in the top of the enclosure. See
Figure 4-23.
See Remote Pull Station Installation Section of this chapter for
remote pull station installation guidelines.
GAS SHUT OFF VALVE INSTALLATION
The ENMCU2 Enclosure can be used to operate a mechanical
gas shut-off valve. This valve is located in the fuel gas supply line
to the cooking appliance(s). The valve body has an arrow which
indicates direction of gas flow through the valve. The gas shut-off
valve is spring loaded and requires five pounds of force to hold
it open. This force is supplies by a 1/16" diameter stainless steel
cable that is connected to the ENMCU2.
See 'Gas Shut-Off Valve Installation" section of this chapter for
gas valve shut-off installation guidelines.
After the valve is installed in the gas line, 1/2" conduit must be
run from the top center knockout of the gas valve box to the top
or bottom knockout in the enclosure. See Figure 4-25. A Protex
Series II corner pulley is used wherever a change in conduit
direction is required.
Remove the gas valve cover and thread the stainless steel cable
through the conduit back to the ENMCU2. If the cable enters the
enclosure through the bottom knockout, the cable must be run
over the gas valve line pulley (see Figure 4-24). If the cable enters
the enclosure through the top knockout, the cable must be run
under the gas valve line pulley (see Figure 4-25). Thread the cable
through the hole in the gas valve ratchet wheel. The line must
then be crimped, and the crimp positioned inside the center of the
ratchet wheel.
d CAUTION Ls
The gas valve cable must always utilize the gas valve pulley
and exit the top or bottom of the enclosure. The gas valve
cable cannot exit the side of the enclosure.
At the gas valve, loop the cable through the valve stem and secure
it with the crimp provided (see Figure 4-16)
The gas valve line can now be put into a set position by applying
tension to the gas valve line. This is accomplished by using a ½"
hex wrench on the gas valve ratchet wheel. The ratchet wheel will
be ratcheted in a clockwise direction until the gas valve is fully
open. Secure the gas valve cover plate to the gas valve box with
the four (4) screws provided. The gas valve line is now in a set
position. See Figure 4-23 and Figure 4-24.
CAUTION L
Do not overtighten gas valve. Overtightening the gas valve
may cause the valve to not close completely, thus not fully
shutting the fuel supply off to the appliance.
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 Page rev. C 64 Part# 10053
Figure 4-24: Gas Valve / Electrical Switch Installation.
Figure 4-25: Gas Valve / Electrical Switch Installation.
Chapter 4 - Installation
0 LECTRICAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
he MSSPDT2, MSDPDT2, MS3PDT2, or MS4PDT-EN
Electrical Switch is available for use where an electrical output is
required. These switches can be field installed in the ENMCU2
Master Enclosure. See Figure 4-24 and/or Figure 4-25.
These switches may be used to provide an electrical signal to the
main breaker and/or operate electrical accessories provid-ed the
rating of the switch is not exceeded. Wiring connections for the
MSSPDT2 are shown in Figure 4-21 (page 61). The contact
ratings for both switches are as follows:
Contact Ratings For Electrical Switches
21 amps 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or
2 HP, 250,277 VAC
Three (3) knockouts are provided for Electrical Switch wiring.
The upper right-side knockout must be used when the gas valve
line exits the bottom of the enclosure (see Figure 4-24). The lower
right-side knockout must be used when the gas valve line exits the
top of the enclosure (see Figure 4-25). An additional knockout
located on the top of the enclosure is also provided (see Figure 4-
25) and may be used in either situation.
NOTE
No electrical connections shall be made inside the control
head. All electrical wiring shall exit the control head through
the knockout on the side of the box. All electrical connections
must be made in an approved electrical box.
GAS VALVE
LINE PULLEY
GAS VALVE
LINE PULLEY
S
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
Page rev. C
65 Part# 10053
_.11ajiLt.I _T LL1o1a1talltill
CYLINDER INSTALLATION
1. SINGLE CYLINDER INSTALLATION -
L1600/ 3000/4600.
The ENMCU2 Master Enclosure can be used for single cylinder
installations. It can support either the L1600, L3000 or L4600
cylinder assemblies. The cylinder must be placed in the enclosure
with the discharge port to the left. No additional mounting
bracket is required when the ENMCU2 is used.
In order to actuate the agent cylinder from the ENMCU2's
control mechanism, pneumatic tubing must be used to connect
the actuator to the valve cap assembly of the agent cylinder valve.
A 1/4" NPT x 1/4', 45° flare type elbow is included and must be
installed in the actuator of the ENMCU2 Enclosure. See Figure
4-26.
Figure 4-26: Single Cylinder Installation with an ENMCU2
Mechanical Control Unit.
NOTE
Pneumatic tubing used for remote cylinder actuation shall
have an outside diameter of 1/4" with a minimum wall
thickness of 1/32". This is commonly known as refrigeration-
type copper tubing. All tubing fittings shall be of the 1/4",
45° flare type conforming to SAE J513c.
Compression type fittings are not acceptable.
MULTIPLE CYLINDER INSTALLATION - L1600,
L3000/4600.
The ENS Slave Enclosure can be used in conjunction with
the ENMCU2 Master Enclosure or MCH2 Control Head for
multiple cylinder installations. A single ENMCU2 can be used
to pneumatically actuate a maximum of three (3) agent cylinders.
One (1) agent cylinder can be installed in the ENMCU2
Enclosure; the additional agent cylinder(s) can either be mounted
in an ENS Enclosure or with an MB15 Mounting Bracket.
When an enclosure is used, the cylinders must be placed in the
enclosure(s) with the discharge port to the left. No additional
mounting bracket is required when a cylinder is installed in the
ENMCU2 or ENS Enclosure.
In order to actuate the agent cylinders from the ENMCU2,
pneumatic tubing must be used to connect the ENMCU2 actuator
to the valve cap assembly of each agent cylinder valve. Pneumatic
tubing must be run from the actuator in the ENMCU2 to the
ENS(s) through the side knockout. A 1/4", 45° flare x 1/4", 45°
flare x 1/4' NPT tee is included with the ENS enclosure and
must be installed in the ENMCU2 actuator. See Figure 4-27.
A single ENMCU2 can actuate a maximum of three (3) cylinders
with a cumulative total of up to 8' of copper tubing.
S
Figure 4-27: Multiple Cylinder Installation with an ENMCU2 Master Enclosure and ENS Slave Enclosures
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 66 Part # 10053
S
Chapter 4 - Installation
0 YSTEM CHECKOUT AFTER
NSTALLATION
Before putting the system into service, all components must
be checked for proper operation. During this checkout, assure
that the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge is not installed in the
ENMCU2 actuator. Remove the pull pin from the hole in the
slide plate.
To check satisfactory operation of the control mechanism, cut the
terminal link or the "5" hook holding the link. This will relieve all
tension on the fusible link line and operate the control mechanism.
The slide plate will have moved fully to the right. The gas valve
cable will have been released, causing the gas valve to close. Any
auxiliary equipment connected to the dry contacts of the solenoid
monitor and/or the Electrical Switch in the ENMCU2 Enclosure
will have operated.
If any of these events fail to occur, the problem must be
investigated and repaired.
Repair the terminal link and put the fusible link line back into the
set position. This is accomplished by using a ½" hex wrench on the
fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratchet wheel will be ratcheted
in a clockwise direction until the spring plate is parallel to the top
of the enclosure.
0-
CAUTION
Before screwing the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge into
the actuator, ensure that the actuator has a Teflon 0-ring
installed.
Once the fusible link line is set, the control mechanism can be
placed in the set position. To set the control mechanism, the slide
plate is moved from right to left, ensuring the bolt extending from
the cam arm is in the slot provided in the slide plate. Continue
moving the slide plate to the left until the latching arm is in the
locked position. Once the control mechanism is set, pull the pull
handle on the remote pull station to assure that the control head
operates. If the control mechanism operates normally, the control
mechanism can be reset as described above. Insert the pull pin
into the hole in the slide plate above the latching arm. Replace the
pull station handle, pull pin, and nylon tie.
Assure that the gas valve is fully open by ratcheting the gas valve
ratchet wheel. Do not overtighten.
Verify that the wet chemical cylinder pressure gauge indicator
shows the correct operating pressure. If the system has a PAC100
installed, verify that the pressure indicator shows the correct
operating pressure.
Using a felt-tipped marker, write the date of installation on
the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge. Screw the cartridge into the
ENMCU2 actuator until hand-tight. Never use a wrench to
tighten the cartridge into the actuator.
Remove the pull pin from the hole in the slide plate. Secure the
ENMCU2 or ENS cover with the screws provided.
S
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
Page rev. C
67 Part# 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
NOTES: S
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 68 Part # 10053
Chapter 5 - Maintenance
O CHAPTER V
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
GENERAL 12. Verify that the wet chemical cylinder (and, if part of the
This chapter will detail the basic information necessary for proper system, the PAC100) are pressurized as intended.
maintenance of the Protex Series II Restaurant Fire Suppression ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
System. However, before attempting any system maintenance, 1. Inspect as per semi-annual maintenance instructions. Do not
it is necessary to attend a Factory Certification Training Class reconnect control head at this time. and become certified to install and maintain the Protex Series
II Restaurant Fire Suppression System. Because it is difficult to
completely understand every aspect of an intricate pre-engineered
system simply by reading the Technical Manual, Heiser Logistics
will not be responsible for system maintenance performed by any
non-certified person(s).
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
Check that the hazard area has not changed.
Check that the system has not been tampered with, ie., nozzles
removed, nozzles not aimed properly, piping not supported
properly, blow off caps in place.
Check the entire system for mechanical damage.
Check all nozzle orifices to make certain they are not plugged
Replace blow off caps or 0-ring if necessary.
/t CAUTION d
Before continuing, remove the cover from the control head
and insert the safety pin in the hole in the slide plate above
the latching arm. This will secure the system, preventing
accidental discharge.
Disconnect the discharge piping from the valve outlet. Using
air or nitrogen, blow out the piping. Replace all nozzle caps.
Replace the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge.
Replace the control head cover and tamper seal.
Reconnect the control head.
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE
Along with the required annual maintenance requirements,
the cylinders (and, if part of the system, the PAC100) must be
removed from the system, properly discharged, and hydrostatically
tested to the factory marked pressure, per the requirements of
NFPA-17A 7-5. The tank should be refilled with fresh agent, per
the recharge section of this manual.
Disconnect the control head from the tank, or disconnect the
pneumatic tubing from the control head
Remove the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge in the control head.
Inspect the pulley elbows for excessive grease buildup. Clean
elbows if necessary. Replace fusible links.
Remove the safety pin from the slide plate. Actuate the control
head by cutting the "5" hook at the terminal detector to ensure
it is functioning properly. Make certain the gas shut-off valve
operates correctly. Reset the link detection line and gas valve,
then activate the remote pull station and ensure that the control
head and gas valve operate correctly.
Reinstall the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge, and replace the
control head cover. Replace the tamper seal on the remote
manual pull.
1O.Reconnect the control head or pneumatic tubing.,
11.Check the agent cylinder (and, if part of the system, the .PAC100) for corrosion, excessive pitting, structural damage,
fire damage, or repairs by soldering, welding, or brazing. If
any such damage or repairs are found, hydrostatically test the
equipment to the factory marked pressure, per NFPA-17A 5-5
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 69 Part # 10053
Chapter 5 - Maintenance
NOTES:
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 70 Part # 10053
Chapter 6 - Recharge
CHAPTER VI
SYSTEM RECHARGE
GENERAL
This chapter will detail the basic information necessary for proper
recharge of the Protex Series II Restaurant Fire Suppression
System. However, before attempting any system recharge, it is
necessary to attend a Factory Certification Training Class and
become certified to install, maintain, and recharge the Protex
Series II Restaurant Fire Suppression System. Because it is
difficult to completely understand every aspect of an intricate
pre-engineered system simply by reading the Technical Manual,
Heiser Logistics will not be responsible for system recharge
performed by any non-certified person(s).
SYSTEM CLEANUP
CAUTION
Before attempting any cleanup, make certain that all fuel
sources to the equipment to be cleaned have been shut
off. Make certain that the exhaust hood and all appliance
electrical controls have been de-energized to avoid any chance
of electrical shock resulting from the cleaning process of
electrically conductive alkaline liquid agent and/or its residue.
Make certain all surfaces to be cleaned have cooled down to
room temperature.
Do not use water to clean any appliances that contain
hot grease or cooking oils. Doing so may result in violent
steaming and/or spattering.
4. Slowly remove the valve and siphon tube. If there is any residual
pressure left in the tank, it will bleed out through the pressure
relief slot in the valve threads.
5. The complete piping system must be flushed after a discharge.
Flushing solution, Part No. 79656, must be used when flushing
the system. The solution is shipped in a 32 ox. container. An
L1600 tank requires 1/2 container of solution. An L3000 tank
requires 1 container of solution. An L4600 requires 1-1/2
containers, and an L6000 requires 2 containers. To prepare the
system for flushing:
Pour the required amount of flushing solution into the tank.
Fill the tank approximately half full with warm, clear water.
Agitate the tank for a few seconds and then add more warm
water to bring the level to the required fill line using the
measuring stick, Part No. 551039.
Reinstall valve and pickup tube and pressurize tank to 225
psi and reinstall to piping network.
6. With nozzles in place, attach control head and manually actuate
the tank. Allow the tank to completely discharge through the
piping network.
After the discharge is completed, the entire piping network
must be blown out with air or nitrogen until no more mist is
visual coming out of the nozzles.
8. Remove, clean, and reinstall all nozzles.
SYSTEM RECHARGE
NOTE
Determine the cause of system discharge and correct
immediately before performing system recharge.
After discharge, inspect the entire system for mechanical
damage. If the tank has sustained any mechanical damage, it
must be hydrostatically tested before refilling.
Disconnect the 1/4 in. actuation tubing or the control head
from the top of the tank valve.
Relieve the pressure from the top chamber of the tank valve by
•
depressing the core of the valve in the valve cap assembly. By
performing this operation, the valve will close.
Remove the tank from the system. Slowly remove the valve and
siphon. If there is any residual pressure left in the tank, it will
bleed out through the pressure relief slot in the valve threads.
The valve and pressure regulator (located in outlet of valve)
must be cleaned and rebuilt after each discharge. To rebuild the
valve, use rebuilding kit, Part No. 490420698. To rebuild the
pressure regulator, use rebuilding kit, Part No. 551061. Each
kit includes an instruction sheet listing detailed rebuilding
instructions.
Fill tank with required amount of Protex agent, Part No.
RL1600 or RL3000.
NOTE
During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 T to 80
°F (16 C to 27 CC).
III EX421 December 13. 2005
Page rev. C
71 100qq
Chapter 6 - Recharge
11. Reinstall valve and pickup tube and pressurize tank to 225 psi
(using recharge adaptor, Part No. 551240).
NOTE
The regulator must be removed from the valve body before
a recharge can be attempted. The recharge adaptor (P/N
551240) is threaded into the discharge port of the valve, not
the regulator. See figure 6-1. Once the recharge is completed,
the recharge adaptor is removed from the discharge port of
the valve and the regulator is reinstalled.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to recharge through the regulator.
Invert the tank after pressurizing to clear any air trapped in the
pickup tube. Using a soap solution, check for leaks. Reinstall to
piping network.
NOTE
The pressure gauge attached to the tank valve (or, if part of
the system, the PAC100) should not be used to determine
when the charging pressure has been reached. A pressure
regulator and separate, calibrated test pressure gauge must be
used.
Check the agent cylinder (and, if part of the system, the
PAC100) for corrosion, excessive pitting, structural damage,
fire damage, or repairs by soldering, welding, or brazing. If
any such damage or repairs are found, hydrostatically test the
equipment to the factory marked pressure, per NFPA-17A 5-5
Verify that the wet chemical cylinder (and, if part of the
system, the PAC100) are pressurized as intended.
RECHARGE
ADAPTOR (P/N
)NNECT
S
Figure 6-1: Recharge Adaptor & Quick Connect
Replace all fusible links by following the instructions listed in
the Installation Section.
Reset control head(s), accessories, pull stations and gas valves
by following the instructions listed in the Installation Section.
Reconnect the control head, reinstall the carbon dioxide pilot
cartridge, and replace the control head cover. Replace the
tamper seal on the remote manual pull.
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 72 Part # 10053
COMPONENTS LIST
WLARTNo.. DESCRIPTION PART No. DESCRIPTION
I600 1.6 Gallon Cylinder 4075H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve 3/4"
L3000 3.0 Gallon Cylinder Assembly 4100H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve i'
L4600 4.6 Gallon Cylinder Assembly 4I25H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve 1-1/4"
L6000 6.o Gallon Cylinder Assembly 4150H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve 1-1/2"
PACIOO Pneumatic Actuating Cylinder 4200H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve a"
MBI Mounting Bracket (For L6000) 4250 Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve 2-1/2'
MBI5 Mounting Bracket 4300 Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve "
(For Li600, L3000 & L4600) MSSPDTZ Electrical Switch One Switch Assembly
MBP2 Mounting Bracket MSDPDTZ Electrical Switch Two Switch Assembly
(For MCH2) MS3PDT2 Electrical Switch Three Switch
MCH2 Mechanical Control Head Assembly
ENMCUZ Enclosure (For Primary Cylinder) MS4PDT2 Electrical Switch Four Switch Assembly
ENS Enclosure (For Secondary Cylinder) CO26 CO2 Cartridge
NLIH Wet Nozzle 90KBS Corner Pulley— Compression
NLIL Wet Nozzle 90SB Corner Pulley - Set Screw
NL2H Wet Nozzle 1513 Tee Pulley— Compression
NL2L Wet Nozzle 490020831 Wet Valve Cap Assembly
NL2D Wet Nozzle 385420705 Conical Spring (Wet Valve)
423572 Swivel Adaptor 551236 Pressure Gauge (Wet Valve)
RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station 550985 Pressure Regulator Assembly
ZIoSH Link Housing Kit 490420698 Wet Valve Rebuilding Kit
FLH25 Fusible Link Hanger 551o6i Pressure Regulator Rebuild Kit
3231 Fusible Link i65°F "ML" VTI Valve Tool (Wet Valve)
3232 Fusible Link 212F "ML" 325420716 Neck 0-Ring (Wet Valve)
3233 Fusible Link 280F "ML" 490020719 Piston (Wet Valve)
3234 Fusible Link 36o°F "ML" 325420715 Piston 0-Ring (Wet Valve)
3235 Fusible Link 45o°F "ML" 325420714 Valve Cap 0-Ring (Wet Valve)
Fusible Link oo'F "ML" RLI600 1.6 Gallon Recharge S3236
8075 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 3/4" RL3000 3.0 Gallon Recharge
8100 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve " L3000T 3.0 GallonTest Tank
812 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 1-1/4" L4600T 4.6 Gallon Test Tank
8io Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 1-1/2" L6000T 6.o GallonTest Tank
8200 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 2" 305420623 Wet Nozzle Cap (io Per Package)
8250 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 2-1/2" 305420726 Wet Nozzle Strainer (io Per Package)
8300 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 3" 305420725 Wet Nozzle 0-Ring (10 Per Package)
835 Reset Relay 305020028 Valve Stem 0-Ring
551175 Complete Wet Valve Assembly
551240 Recharge Adaptor
551039 Measuring Stick
310S Crimps (ioo Per Package)
79656 Flushing Solution (32-0z.)
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 73 Part # 10053
NOTES:
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 74 Part # 10053
Material Safety Data Sheet U.S. Department of Labor
May be used to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSHA's Hazard Communication Standard, (Non-Mandatory Form)
29 CFR 1910.1200. Standard must be Form Approved
suited for specific requirements. OMB No. 1218-0072
TITY (As Used on Label and List) Note: Blank spaces are not permitted. If any item is not applicable or no
Protex Series II Wet Chemical Solution information is available, the space must be marked to indicate that.
Section I
Manufacturer's Name Emergency Telephone Number
HEISER LOGISTICS, INC. (800) 255-3924
Address (Number, Street, City, State, and ZIP Code) Telephone Number for Information
2370 Firehall Road • P0 Box 730 (585) 394-8692
Date Prepared
Canandaigua, NY 14424 February 22, 2002
Signature of Preparer (optional)
Section II - Hazardous Ingredients/Identity Information
Other Limits
Hazardous Components (Specific Chemical Identity, Common Name(s)) OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV Recommended % (optional)
Potassium Carbonate
(potash: K2 CO3)
CAS No. 00584-08-7 none
Section III - Physical/Chemical Characteristics
Boiling Point Specific Gravity (H20 = 1)
approx. 230 OF approx. 1.4
Vapor Pressure (mm Hg.) Melting Point
approx. 12 mm Hg not applicable
Vapor Density (AIR = 1) Evaporation Rate
n. a. (Butyl Acetate = 1) n. a.
Solubility in Water
completely miscible
Appearance and Odor
odorless clear water - white liquid
Section IV - Fire and Explosion Hazard Data
Flash Point (Method Used) Flammable Limits LEL UEL
not combustible n. a. n. a. n. a.
Extinguishing Media
not combustible
Special Fire Fighting Procedures
not combustible
usual Fire and Explosion Hazards
none
(Reproduce locally)
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 75 Part # 10053
Section V - Reactivity Data
Stability Unstable - Conditions to Avoid
Stable
Incompatibility (Materials to Avoid)
ammonium compounds; acids, corrodible metals (copper aluminum)
Hazardous Decomposition or Byproducts
ammonia cieneration with ammonium compounds
Hazardous May Occur Conditions to Avoid
Polymerization
Will Not Occur
Section VI - Health Hazard Data
Route(s) of Entry: Inhalation? Skin? Ingestion?
yes yes yes
Health Hazards (Acute and Chronic)
mild to severe irritation and/or tissue damage
depending upon duration of contact
Carcinogenicity NIP? IARC Monographs? OSHA Regulated?
no no no
Signs and Symptoms of Exposure
Irritation of tissue. Possible progressing to tissue damage.
Medical Conditions
Generally Aggravated by Exposure skin sensitivity
Emergency and First Aid Procedures
Eyes and skin; flush immediately with copious amounts of water. Administer large amounts of water.
INGESTION: Do not induce vomiting; obtain medical attention immediately.
Section VII - Precautions for Safe Handling and Use
Steps to Be Taken in Case Material Is Released or Spilled
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing. Avoid breathing mist or spray.
Wear chemical splash goggles, rubber gloves and protective clothing.
Waste Disposal Method
Contain and remove spill. Flush spill area with large amount of water.
Dispose of liquid and wash with water according to Federal, State and Local regulations.
This product data is supplied as
stipulated by the OSHA "Right to
Know" Regulation 29 CFR 1910.1200
and is offered in good faith as typical
and not as a product specification.
The information contained herein is
based on available data and is
believed to be true and accurate. No
warranty, expressed or implied,
regarding the accuracy of this data,
hazards connected with the use of
the material, or the results to be
obtained from the use thereof, is
made. Heiser Logistics, Inc. assumes NO
responsibility for damage or injury
from the use of the product described
herein.
Work/Hygienic Practices
normal care and awareness
Page 2 *USGPO 1966-491-529/45775
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 76 Part # 10053
Precautions to Be Taken in Handling and Storing
Avoid copper or aluminum containers.
Other Precautions
Avoid contact with acidic materials. Solution is electrically conductive.
Section VIII - Control Measures
Respiratory Protection (Specify Type)
NIOSH/MSHA approved dust respirator
Ventilation I Local Exhaust Special Adequate
Mechanical (General) Other
Protective Gloves Eye Protection rubber gloves splash goggles
Other Protective Clothing or Equipment
chemically resistant shoes
. <,*,-~ 0
Quantity Flows per (Qty x Flow)
Nozzle Required Nozzle Total Flows
TOTAL FLOW POINTS
CYLINDER(S) REQUIRED
Left to Right
Griddle: 42" x 30"
Range: 28" x 28"
Fryer: 16" x 16"
Fryer: 16")( 16"
Gas Radiant Charbroiler: 26" x 24"
Wok: 25" Diameter
Hood: 14' x 4'
Duct: 30" x 12"
Clearance above appliances: 40"
Sheet 1
Nozzle
Quantity Flows per (Qty x Flow)
Required Nozzle Total Flows
TOTAL FLOW POINTS
CYLINDER(S) REQUIRED
Left to Right
Range: 12" x 28"
Griddle: 30" x 30"
Fryer: 16")( 16"
Upright Broiler with Drip Pan: 30" x 34"
Wok: 28" Diameter
Hood: 10' x 4'
Duct: 16" x 16"
Clearance above appliances: 42" . Sh2
REVISED
Fryer
Multiple Nozzle Protection
Important: Page 3-10 (1st aragraph) - Highlight.
Each module must not exeod the maximum area allowed for a single nozzle.
However, when using multiple nozzle protection, the longest side allowed for a fryer
with drip board can be used, regardless of whether the fryer has a drip board or not.
The maximum size fryer that can be modularized is 864 sq. in.
Two sets of numbers you are going to work with when modularizing a fryer.
Reference page 3-3, "Fry-.--S. with drip boards."
Write these sets of numbers at the top of your board.
324 sq. in.; 271/4" longest side: maximum area with drip— 500 sq. in.
371 sq. in.; 25%" longest side; maximum area with drip-495 sq. in.
S
0
4 26"
10.66"
f
0
10.66"
I
0
t -
10.66"
— — — — — — — — — — — -
0
4 26"
Old method would require
4 nozzles
Or you could just equally
divide the three sections into
10.66" each I
32"
I
324 sq. in.; 273/4" longest side; maximum area with drip— 500 sq. in.
S 371 sq. in.; 253/8" longest side; maximum area with drip— 495 sq. in.
EXAMPLE #1
4 26"
I
32"
No
drip board
26 x 32 = 832 sq. in.
832 = 2.56 nozzles
324 longest side: 273/4"
832 = 2.24 nozzles
371 longest side: 253/8"
Use #1 because it meets the
longest side.
S
Start from the back of the vat,
and figure the opposite side
324 = 12.46"
26"
4 1 26"
12.46"
12.46"
I
7.08"
V
I
32"
I
EXAMPLE #2
324 sq. in.; 273/4" longest side; maximum area with drip— 500 sq. in.
371 sq. in.; 253/8" longest side; maximum area with drip— 495 sq. in. S
24"
30" vat
(36"
overall)
24 x 30 = 720 sq. in.
720 = 2.22 nozzles
324 longest side: 27/4" (w/drip 500 sq. in.)
720 = 1.9 nozzles
371 longest side: 25/8" (w/drip 495 sq. in.)
Use #2 because it meets the longest side and requires
fewer nozzles..
6" drip
24"
f Again, start from the back of the vat to figure opposite side.
371 sq. in. = 15.45 sq. in.
15.45" 24
24 x 15.45 = 370.8 sq. in.
24 x 14.55 = 349.2 sq. in.
Now you need to include the drip board
14.55" 14.55"+6" = 20.55"
24x20.55=493.2 sq. in.
This does not exceed allowable sq. in. of 495
(included in our set of numbers)
2 nozzles would cover this fryer.
24" 10
0:0
36" I
w/drip
Old method would require
4 nozzles
t
30" vat
(36"
overall)
I
[II
6" drip
S
n
324 sq. in.; 273/4" longest side; maximum area with drip— 500 sq. in.
S 371 sq. in.; 253/8" longest side; maximum area with drip— 495 sq. in.
EXAMPLE #3
.* 10" .
This fryer could be a small donut fryer with a chain running through it.
10 x 27.5 = 270 sq. in.
Al
Longest side is okay and sq. in. is okay.
55"
overall
(no drip)
S
S
S
S
0
Heiser
S
LOGISTICS
Protex TI® Wet Chemical System Certification Test
Company Name:
Name:
Address:
Phone Number: Fax Number:
0 (Please print Compcmy Name and your Name exactly as you would like it to appear on your certificate)
5 2370 FIREHALL ROAD • PO Box 730
CANANDAIGUA, NEW YORK 14424
FAX: 585.394.0617 I 800.782.2937
Toll-free Order and Customer Service. 1.800.828.9638
PROTEX IT® WET CHEMICAL SYSTEM CERTIFICATION TEST
NOTE: This is an open book test to access
your understanding of the material covered
in the technical manual. Please fill out the
information requested on the answer sheet.
Please print legibly on your answer sheet,
as this information will appear on your
certification. 100% is required for passing.
1. The operating temperature range of the PROTEX Il® system is
00 to 1200 F
_200 to 1200 F
320 to 120°
o°toio°F
2. The PROTEX IT® system is
Underwriters Laboratories Listed
Factory Mutual Approved
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Listed
Both a and c
3. The cylinders are pressurized:
To 350 psi with CO2
To 175 psi with dry nitrogen
To 225 psi with dry nitrogen
The cylinders are shipped uncharged
4. The Extinguishing Agent
Must be discarded after 2 years in service
Is acidic
Is shipped in 3 gallon containers or 1.6 gallon containers
5. The model MB15 mounting bracket is used for all four tank sizes
True
False
6. When actuating a system containing 1 to 3 cylinders:
The MCH2 control head can be used
The PACioo must be used
7. A single tank system using the MCH2 control head will require:
A gas valve or electric shut off
An auxiliary alarm
An RPSM Remote Manual Pull Station
a and c
S
8. The 1513 Tee Pulley
S
a. Is used to connect two manual pull stations to a control head
b. Is used to connect two mechanical gas valves to a single control head
c. Is used to connect two detection lines to a single control head
d. aandb
9.A hood has an exhaust plenum measuring 12 ft. X 4 ft. with two exhaust ducts each measuring 24" x 6". Three chicken
fryers without drip board each measuring 247 X 30" are located side by side. What is the least amount of flows to
protect this hazard?
12 flows
18 flows
16 flows
19 flows
io. Referring to figure i, what type nozzle and how many would be required to protect each range?
NL2H nozzle, 2 required
NLiH nozzle, 2 required
NL2L nozzle, 2 required
One NL2L nozzle and one NLiH nozzle
ii. Referring to figure i, what type nozzle and how many would be required to protect the plenum?
NL2H nozzle, i required
NLiH nozzle, 2 required
NLiH nozzle, i required
NL2H nozzle, 2 required
S Referring to figure i, what is the minimum system necessary to protect this kitchen
Two L4600 tanks
One L4600 and one L3000 tank
Two L3000 tanks
One L6000 tank
13. Split systems are allowed with all tank sizes
True
False
14. A split system with 4 two flow nozzles, 2 one flow nozzles, io feet of ½" pipe and a total of 53 feet of 3/8" pipe would
give a maximum pipe volume of
3767.4 ml
1993.5 ml
C. 2585.5 ml
d. 1890 ml
15. The split system described in question 14 would require a
L3000
L4600
L6000
tank as a minimum
S
16. A system using a L4600 must have
range, wok or fryer
2,37-5
2, 4.8
C. 1, 37.5
d. 2, 17.6
flows andfeet of 3/8" pipe at/or before a nozzle protecting a
17. The anti-recoil plug
Should be removed when the tank is installed in the bracket and secured
Should never be removed until the discharge piping is ready to be connected
Is to be removed and returned to the factory when the tank is received
Is an integral part of the tank valve and is not to be removed
18. In a PROTEX TI® system using the MCH2 control head, the detection system can use a maximum of
detectors withfeet of cable maximum and a maximum ofcorner pulleys
15,100, 20
20,100, 20
C. 20,150, 40
d. 15,150, 40
19. All discharge piping must be;
Schedule 40 black, stainless steel, or galvanized
Schedule 40 black, chrome plated, or stainless steel
Any schedule 40 pipe and 300 lb. Class fittings
20. Pipe tape must be used
On all discharge piping
On all piping within the hood
Only on piping over fryers, ranges and woks
Pipe tape is not required on any piping
21. Before installing the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge
Check the date of manufacture
Check the cartridge receiver to be sure a Teflon washer or 0-Ring is installed
The control head must be in the actuated position
Make sure the ring pin is removed
S
0
S
22. The fuse links must be changed at minimum
a. Semi-Annually
b. Annually
23. The carbon dioxide pilot cartridge must be changed
Semi-Annually
Annually
24. After a discharge of a PROTEX IT® system
The piping must be flushed using flushing, solution (p/n 79656)
The valve must be rebuilt
The regulator must be rebuilt
All of the above
25. All fusible links must be replaced after a discharge due to a fire.
True
False
L
64
t 2'-ll
L
V-4 SALAMANDER
I •.. I.. S...
4'V I
II
FRYER FRYER BROILER
64 64
I 00 00 I 5555 I I
GRIDDLE II I I RANGE II I I RANGE
I 24x36
I COOKING AREA
p
(2) FRYERS WITH
ORIPSOARD 14x15VAT
14x21OVERAI..L
24 DEEP 4 BURN
ER
3& WiDE 24 WIDE x DEEP
-2..r---, .-28---5
FIGURE 1
S
n
Protex Il® Certffication Test, Answer Sheet
Name: Date:
Company
Incorrect if marked off
i. a b c d 3
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
io. a b c d 0
ii. a b c d 0
12. a b c d 0
13*
a b
b a
c
c
d
d
0
0 -
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
a b c d 0
0
LAST: Personnel trained in the proper operation of hand portable extinguishers can stand by to watch for
reignition if means of easy exit are available. Anyone who is not trained should exit the premises
immediately.
When the fire has been extinguished, call your local authorized Protex Series II distributor to recharge the system, after
determining the cause of fire.
Under no circumstances should cooking operations resume before qualified personnel reinstate the integrity of your fire
suppression system.
MAINTENANCE
The Protex Series II is a sophisticated fire suppression system involving intricate mechanical components. To ensure the
proper operation of the system, regular inspection and maintenance must be performed by an authorized, trained Protex
Series II distributor on a semi-annual basis, or after every periodic hood and duct cleaning (whichever occurs more
frequently).
This system is made up of parts listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. with limitations contained in the detailed
installation manual. The authorized distributor must be consulted after the system is discharged or whenever changes
are planned for the system and/or area of protection.
In addition to the regularly scheduled maintenance, as an owner, you are required each month, per NFPA-17A 5-2.1, to
inspect and verify the following:
The extinguishing system is in its proper location.
The maintenance tag or certificate is in place.
The manual actuators are unobstructed.
The pressure gauge(s), if provided, is in operable
range.
No obvious physical damage or condition exists that
might prevent operation.
The tamper indicators and seals are intact.
The hood, duct, and protected cooking appliances
have not been replaced, modified, or relocated.
The nozzle blowoff caps are intact and undamaged.
If you find any deficiencies, you must have them corrected immediately. You must keep records for any extinguishing
system found to require corrective actions. The date of inspection and the initials of the person making the monthly
inspection must be recorded. You must retain these records for the period between the semiannual maintenance.
MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY
It makes good business sense for you to take an interest in the following areas of your business operation to ensure the
best possible fire protection for your restaurant:
Arrange for proper inspection and maintenance of the fire control system as well as hand portable extinguishers.
Eliminate all potentially combustible materials or arrange for their proper storage.
Arrange for upgrading of the fire suppression system if cooking equipment is added or revised, and provide
protection for changes made to the ventilation system.
Arrange for a continuing education program in the restaurant fire suppression system operation as new
employees are added to the staff.
Remember, fire hazards within restaurant cooking and ventilation equipment are real. Many restaurants that have fires
never re-open for business, and many suffer severe financial loss due to lack of business continuity. Your Protex Series
II restaurant fire suppression system is a mechanical device and, as such, requires periodic service by your distributor's
qualified and trained personnel.
This owner's manual is not intended to serve as instructions for installation or service of the Protex Series II system,
but rather to inform purchasers of this equipment as to their responsibilities in the proper usage and maintenance of
this system. A copy of the detailed manual outlining Underwriters Laboratories Listing of the Protex Series II system is
available upon request from an authorized Protex Series II distributor or directly from Heiser Logistics. However, because
it is difficult to completely understand every aspect of an intricate pre-engineered system simply by reading the Technical
Manual, Heiser Logistics will not be responsible for system installation, modification, or recharge performed by any non-
certified person(s).
This system is made up of units tested within limitations contained in the detailed installation manual. An
Authorized System Designer must be consulted whenever changes are planned for the system or area of
protection. An Authorized Installer or System Designer must be consulted after the system has discharged.
Installer:
Address:
City: State: Zip:
In case of emergency, contact________________________________________________________
To contact an Authorized Protex Series II distributor in your area for service, contact the
company listed above, or Heiser Logistics at (800) 828-9638 or (585) 394-8692.
System information
L1600 MCH2 PAC100_________
L3000 L4600 L6000
Duct Size (s) Hood size(s)
Appliances
Range "x " Griddle "x " Fryer
x ,, x ,, x
x ,, x ,, x
Wok "dia. "dia. "dia.
Upright Broiler "x " 'Tilting Skillet
Radiant Charbroiler "x " Lava Rock Charbroiler
Class "A" Charbroiler "x " Chain Charbroiler
Other appliances:
-
0*
This system must be designed and installed by an Authorized Protex Distributor
to ensure proper performance. Please consultthe Authorized Distributor before
moving, adding, or rearranging appliances; or when any modification to the
cooking area is made.
Heiser Logistics will not be responsible for system installation, modification, or
recharge performed by any non-certified person(s).
It T
I
TECHNICAL
MANUAL
Components, Design,
Installation and
Maintenance of the
ProTex II Wet Chemical
Restaurant Kitchen
Fire Suppression
System
Heiser
LOGISTICS
35 North Street, Suite 50 • Canandaigua, NY 14424 • 800-828-9638
Heiser
S LOGISTICS
11'
SION
October 1, 2008
To. Protex II Pre-Engineered System Distribuc:s
From. Kevin Mussack, Vice President, Operations
Subject. Henny Penny Fryers
S
Heiser Logistics is pleased to announce
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) newly listed
fryer protection using the ProTex II Restaurant Fire
Suppression System for select Henny Penny Frye:
models. As part of this newly listed protection,
Heiser Logistics is also introducing a new 2F flat-
spray nozzle, which is included in and sold only as
part of the new HP Nozzle Assembly Kit, Part No.
553389.
The listed protection outlined in this bulletin is
for both gas and electric Henny Penny models
with mono rail or dual lid-lift systems. The listing
also offers protection in both fully open and
intermediate open positions. "Fully open" is defined
as having the loading rack and baskets in the
fully open position. The "intermediate position" is
defined as having the handle unlocked releasing the
steam pressure, with the safety latch still latched
The placement of the nozzle assembly is critical
and must be mounted according to the instructions
of this bulletin, pages 2 and 3. A Heiser Logistics
Henny Penny Instruction Sheet is included with
every HP Nozzle Assembly Kit and will also include
mounting template for locating the Tee Block
posi:ion.
N,te: New Henny Penny Fryer models listed in
this bulletin will come directly from the
manufacturer equipped with the mounting
holes and studs already fabricated into the back
sh:cu:J..
The Heiser Logistics HP Nozzle Assembly Kit, Part
No. 55338, consists of all components necessary
to complete the installation of the nozzle assembly
including nozzles, nozzle swivel adaptors, nozzle
ccps, tee. bieck with fasterLers, close nipples, various
stainless pipe lengths, elbows, and instruction sheet.
Kits are avaiiale 'for immediate shipment.
Use pages 2 and 3 as a manual supplement to the
P:oiex II Design, Installation, Recharge and
Maintenance Manual (Part No. PMAN2/10053)
dazed December 12, 2006 until the next printing of
the manual.
If you have any questicns about this bulletin, please
contact yu Sales Manager at 1-800-828-9638.
ff
,MTAURAPJT
FIRE SUPPRESSIO•
SYSTEM
Aiming Point
S
m)
Top View (12.7 cm)
S
neiser
GISTICS
ProTex II UL-Listed Protection for Henny Penny models are as follows:
Mono Rail Center Lift System - Models 690, 691, 692
Nozzle Type: (1) One NL2H (sold separate from HP Nozzle Assembly Kit), (upper position) and (1) One
2F (lower position).
Nozzle Locations: NL2H Nozzle (upper position): From the Tee Block, Part No. 434424; nozzle tip located 16
in. (40.6 cm) up from base of fryer surface and 5 in. (12.7 cm) in from right side of appliance
back shroud - aimed to discharge at center point of fry vat.
2F Nozzle (lower position): Running down from the Tee Block to the base of the fryer,
nozzle tip is located 2 in. (5.1 cm) from back side of fry vat, and 8 in. (20.3 cm) in from the
right side of appliance back shroud. The 2F nozzle is a flat spray nozzle and the spray must
be horizontal to that of the edge of the back lip of the fry vat.
System Coverage: Each fryer requires a minimum of one L3000 Agent Tank discharging through the two
two-flow nozzles (NL2H and 2F).
Piping Limitations Follow the limitations for the L3000 Agent Tank as stated in the ProTex IlDesign, Instal-
lation, and Maintenance manual, Part No. PMAN2/10053.
Vat Dimensions
WIDTH: 16 in. (40.6 cm)
LENGTH: 201/4 in. (51.4 cm)
DEPTH: 281/2 in. (72.4 cm)
Maximum lid height above vat: 15 in. (38.1 cm)
Tee Block 7/i6in.
(19.2 cm)
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 ii Part # 10053
V L
Heisur
•
0 6 I S T
It'
4STAURANT
FIRE SUPPRESSION
SYSTEM
Aimina Point 5 in.
M
in.
5cm)
Dual Lift System -Models 580, 581, 582, 590, 591, 592, 680, 682
Nozzle Type: (1) One NL2H (sold separate from HP Nozzle Assembly Kit) (upper position) and One 2F
(lower position)
Nozzle Location: NL2H Nozzle (upper position): From the Tee Block, nozzle tip located 16 in. (40.6 cm) up
from base of fryer surface and 5 in. (12.7 cm) in from left side of appliance back shroud -
aimed to discharge at center point of fry vat.
2F Nozzle (lower position): Running down from the Tee Block to the base of the fryer,
nozzle tip is located 2 in. (5.1 cm) from back side of fry vat, and 8 in. (20.3 cm) in from the
left side of appliance back shroud. The 2F nozzle is a flat spray nozzle and the spray must be
horizontal to that of the edge of the back lip of the fry vat.
System Coverage: Each fryer requires a minimum of one L3000 Agent Tank discharging through the two
two-flow nozzles (NL2H and 2F).
Piping Limitations Follow the limitations for the L3000 Agent Tank as stated in the ProTex II Design, Instal-
lation, and Maintenance manual, Part No. PMAN2 / 10053.
S
Vat Dimensions
WIDTH: l6 in. (40.6cm)
LENGTH: 2014 in. (51.4 cm)
DEPTH: 281/2 in. (72.4 cm)
Maximum lid height above vat: 15 in. (38.1 cm)
79A6 in. Tee Block
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 iii Part # 10053
S
S
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 iv Part # 10053
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Small Gas Radiant Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) ............36
Small Gas Radiant Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle) ............37
Large Gas Radiant Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) ............38
Large Gas Radiant Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle) ............39
Lava Rock Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) .....................40
Lava Rock Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle) .....................41
Natural Charcoal Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) .........42
Natural Charcoal Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)...............43
Mesquite Char-broiler (High Mount Nozzle) .....................44
Mesquite Char-broiler (Low Mount Nozzle) ........................45
Upright/Salamander Broiler .............................................46
ChainBroiler ...............................................................47
Piping Limitations .........................................................48
General Piping Requirements ...........................................48
DesignSteps ...............................................................49
Example.....................................................................49
Detector Placement ......................................................52
SYSTEM INSTALLATION ......................................................53
Cylinder Installation ......................................................53
Control Head Installation ................................................53
Fusible Link Detector Installation ....................................
Setting the Control Head ................................................
Remote Pull Station Installation .......................................58
Gas Shut Off Valve Installation ....................................6o
Tee Pulley Installation ...................................................6i
Electrical Switch Installation ..........................................6i
Pipe and Nozzle Installation .............................................62
System Checkout After Installation ....................................62
Enclosure Installation Instructions
(P/N ENMcu2) and (P/N ENS) mounting ..............................63
Fusible Link Detector Installation ....................................63
Setting the ENMCUZ ......................................................64
Remote Pull Station Installation .......................................64
Gas Shut Off Valve Installation .......................................64
Electrical Switch Installation ..........................................65
Cylinder Installation ......................................................66
System Checkout After Installation ....................................67
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ...................................................69
Semi-annual Maintenance .............................................69
Annual Maintenance ......................................................69
12-year Maintenance ......................................................69
SYSTEM RECHARGE .........................................................71
SYSTEM CLEANUP ............................................................71
Components List ............................................................73
Material Safety Data Sheet ................................................75
Record of Document Revisions . ii
GENERAL INFORMATION ....................................................
COMPONENTS ..............................................................3
Cylinders & Valve ..........................................................3
Valve Rebuilding Equipment ...........................................3
Cylinder Bracketing .......................................................4
Extinguishing Agent (P/NS RLI600 & RL3000) .........................4
Mechanical Control Head (P/N McH2) .................................4
Master Enclosure (P/N ENMCUZ) .......................................
Slave Enclosure (P/N ENS) ................................................
Control Head Mounting Bracket (P/N MBpZ) ........................
Pneumatic Actuating Cylinder ...........................................5
Detection Equipment ...................................................6
Remote Mechanical Pull Station (P/N RPSM) ........................7
Gas Shutoff Valves ............................ . ............................. 7
CornerPulleys .............................................................8
Tee Pulley (P/N 15 13) ......................................................9
Electrical Switches ................................................ ......... 9
Reset Relay (P/N 835) ............................................. ........ io
Pipe and Fittings ................................................ ........ io
SYSTEM DESIGN ............................................................ii
System Cylinder Sizing ...................................................ii
Nozzle Coverage and Placement ........................................ix
Plenum Protection ..........................................................13
Appliance Protection ...................................................... 15
Design Index Chart and Nozzle Coverage Summary She........ IS
Fryers without Drip Board (High Mount Nozzle) .................i6
Fryers without Drip Board (Low Mount Nozzle) .................17
Fryers with Drip Board (High Mount Nozzle) .....................i8
Fryers with Drip Board (Low Mount Nozzle) .........................19
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan (High Mount Nozzle) .....................20
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan (Low Mount Nozzle) .....................21
Protecting Large Fryers by Dividing Their Area into Mccules ... 22
Two Burner Range (High Mount Nozzle) ...........................23
Four Burner Range .....................................................24
Four Burner Range Size & Radius Chart ................................ 25
Two Burner Range (Low Mount Nozzle) ............................26
Two Burner Range with High Proximity Backshelf Protection
(Low Mount Nozzle) ...................................................27
Small Wok (High Mount Nozzle) ...................................28
Small Wok (Low Mount Nozzle) ....................................29
Large Wok (High Mount Nozzle) .....................................30
Large Wok (Low Mount Nozzle) .....................................31
Small Griddle (High Mount Nozzle) ..................................32
Small Griddle (Low Mount Nozzle) .................................33
Large Griddle (High Mount Nozzle) .................................34
Large Griddle (Low Mount Nozzle) ................................35
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 Page rev. C
Part# 10053
Part Number:10053
Protex II Restaurant Fire Suppression System Technical Manual
RECORD OF DOCUMENT REVISIONS S
Rev Date Page Was Is
A 27 February 2002 All Written for UL review and approval Revised JAW UL instructions and comments
B 13 December 2005 67 6-Month Maintenance Procedures 5-11; 6-Month Maintenance Procedures
Inspect links; 1-Year Maintenance Procedures 5-12, reorder steps, replace links; 1-Year
1-5 Maintenance Procedures 1-3
B 13 December 2005 3 1st paragraph did not list L1600; Table 2-1: L1600 Tank information listed and included
did not include information for L1600 tank
B 13 December 2005 4 Cylinder Bracketing & MCH2 information Cylinder Bracketing & MCH2 information
did not include L1600 includes L1600
B 13 December 2005 5 ENMCU2 & ENS information did not ENMCU2 & ENS information includes
include L1600 L1600
B 13 December 2005 45 Tank Chart and General Piping Tank Chart and General Piping
Requirements did not include L1600 Requirements include L1600 information
information
B 13 December 2005 51 Cylinder Installation did not include L1600 Cylinder Installation includes L1600
information information
B 13 December 2005 64 Single and Multiple Cylinder Installation Single and Multiple Cylinder Installation
information did not include L1600 information includes L1600
B 13 December 2005 69 System Recharge Step 5 did not include System Recharge Step 5 includes information
information for L1600 for L1600
B 13 December 2005 71 Components List did not include L1600 Components List includes L1600
B 13 December 2005 73 Phone Number: 716 394-8692 Phone Number: 585 394-8692
C 12 December 2006 All Set in Helvetica type Set in Adobe Caslon Pro type
C 12 December 2006 i Table of Contents for Rev. A Updated Table of Contents for Rev. C
C 12 December 2006 1 Paragraph numbered 1: "chemical chain "chemical reaction"
reaction"
-
C 12 December 2006 3 Added line of instructions for lubricating
0-rings
C 12 December 2006 4 Added line of instructions for lubricating
0-rings
C 12 December 2006 5 Re: P/N ENS: "used for vertical single used for vertical mounting of a single
L1600.. ." L1600..
C 12 December 2006 5 Fig 2-9: Added "opposite gauge" to callout of
-
discharge port; "diameter" to 4' measurement
C 12 December 2006 6 Fig 2-11: Fusible Link callout pointed to Call-out points to Fusible Link
S-Hook
C 12 December 2006 7 Fig. 2-13: Part RPSM pictured has Protex Updated picture shows Protex II faceplate
2000 faceplate
I Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 vi Part # 10053
Rev Date Page Was Is
C 12 December 2006 8 Fig 244: picture is of older gas valve Picture updated to show current gas valve
C 12 December 2006 9 Fig. 2-18: picture is drawing of Tee Pulley Photograph of T-Pulley
C 12 December 2006 Added Fig. 2-19b: photo showing correct 9
method of making electrical connections
C 12 December 2006 10 Information and photo of P/N SM120 Information and photo of p/n 835 Manual
Solenoid Monitor Reset Relay
rC 12 December 2006 10 Fig. 2-21: callout is for 0-ring Callout has been corrected to "Retaining
Ring (Clip)"
C 12 December 2006 10 Note box regarding marking of nozzles added
C 12 December 2006 11 "...sections must be completed..." '...sections must be completely understood.....
C 12 December 2006 11 'Each of the three "Each of the four..."
C 12 December 2006 11 Information and illustration of NL1L nozzle
duct coverage added; figure numbers updated
C 12 December 2006 15 Mm. Nozzle Height for Large Griddle given Corrected to 10"
as 13'
C 12 December 2006 15 NL1L nozzle coverage of Ducts and Plenum
added
C 12 December 2006 22 Note in 2nd paragraph set in roman type Note set in bold type
C 12 December 2006 22 Examples 1 &2 added to illustrate process of
- - - -
modularizing large fryers
C 12 December 2006 23&24 Four Burner Range 24: Four Burner Range
Two Burner Range High Mount Nozzle 23: Two Burner Range High Mount Nozzle
12 December 2006 24 New instructions, diagram, and example for
Four Burner Range
C 12 December 2006 25 Insertion of page for Nozzle Positioning
Chart for Four Burner Range
C 12 December 2006 26 etseq. Pages renumbered to reflect insertion of page
for chart
C 12 December 2006 26 Two Burner Range Low Mount Nozzle Diagrams redrawn to show preferred
diagrams had no backshelf installations of low mount nozzle
C 12 December 2006 27 Added Two Burner Range w/ High Proximity
Backshelf Protection (Low Mount Nozzle)
C 12 December 2006 28 etseq. Pages renumbered to reflect insertion of page
C
•
12 December 2006 Instructions and diagram for NL2H added 30 (old) Small Griddle High Mount Nozzle included
32 (new) only NL1H
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 vii Part # 10053
Rev Date Page Was Is
C 12 December 2006 31 (old) Small Griddle Low Mount Nozzle included Instructions and diagram for NL2L added
33 (new) only NL1L
C 12 December 2006 33 (old) Large Griddle Low Mount Nozzle mm. Large Griddle Low Mount Nozzle mm.
35 (new) height 13" height 10"
C 12 December 2006 46 (old) Added Minimum Pipe Volumes for a Fryer,
48 (new) Range and Wok table
C 12 December 2006 47 (old) Flow numbers in Example = 9 Flow numbers in Example = 8
49 (new)
C 12 December 2006 55 (old) Fusible link installation instructions call for Fusible link installation instructions call for
57 (new) 1" hex wrench ½" hex wrench
C 12 December 2006 55 (old) Fig. 4-8 shows old MCH2 Current picture inserted
57 (new)
C 12 December 2006 56 (old) Remote Pull Station must be mounted "...no "... no more than 48 inches and no less than
58 (new) more than five feet above the floor...." 42 inches above the floor...
C 12 December 2006 56 (old) Fig. 4-13 shows old MCH2 Current picture inserted
58 (new)
C 12 December 2006 57 (old) Fig. 4-14 shows RPSM with old plate; Current pictures inserted
59 (new) Fig. 4-15 shows old MCH2
C 12 December 2006 58 (old) Fig. 4-17 shows old MCH2 Current picture inserted
60 (new)
C 12 December 2006 56 (old) Fig. 4-18 shows Tee Pulley drawing; Current pictures inserted
58 (new) Fig. 4-20 shows old MCH2
C 12 December 2006 69 (old) Step 10 calls for use of Measuring Stick P/N Measuring Stick wording deleted
71 (new) 551039
C 12 December 2006 70 (old) Recharge Adaptor Kit is P/N PCLAK Part is replaced by P/N 551240
72 (new)
C 12 December 2006 70 (old) Note and Caution regarding recharging only
72 (new) through the recharge adaptor added
C 12 December 2006 70 (old) Fig. 6-1 added: Recharge Adaptor and Quick
72 (new) Connect
C 12 December 2006 71 (old) Parts list updated with new products and part
73 (new) numbers
S
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 viii Part # 10053
Chapter 1 - General Information
CHAPTER I
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Protex Series II Restaurant Fire Suppression System is of the pre-engineered type as defined by NFPA 17A, Standardfor Wet Chemical
Extinguishing Systems and is designed to provide fire protection for restaurant cooking appliances, hoods, and ducts. The Protex Series II
wet chemical extinguishing system unit is intended to be installed, inspected, and maintained in accordance with the specifications outlined
in this manual and NFPA 17A, £'ardardfor Wet ChemicalExtinguishing Systems. Installation and maintenance of the system must conform
to the limitations detailed in this m2nua1 and be performed only by an Authorized Protex Series II dealer.
The Protex Series II System utilizes a wet chemical agent specifically designed to suppress restaurant cooking area fires. The system
provides automatic actuation and can be manually actuated through a remote mechanical pull station. Upon actuation, the system
discharges a pre-determined amoun: of agent through a fixed piping arrangement to the duct, plenum, and cooking appliances. The agent
acts to suppress fires in three ways:
The chemical reaction causing :ombustion is interrupted by both the agent itself and the resulting steam formation.
The agent cools the fire bringing it below auto-ignition temperature.
The agent reacts with hot grtate forming a soap-like layer (saponification) that helps prevent the escape of combustible vapors, thus
preventing re-ignition.
The shutdown of fuel and power :0 all appliances: under protected ventilation equipment is required upon system actuation. The shutdown
of make-up or supply air is recommended upon system actuation but is not required. Exhaust fan(s) in the ventilation system should remain
on during system discharge as they assist the dispersion of chemical through the ventilating system. The system is UL Listed with or
without exhaust fan shutdown.
TEMPERATURE LIMITAT[CNS
The operating temperature range of the Protex Series II System is 32° F. (0° C.) minimum to 120° F. (49° C.) maximum.
UL LISTING
The Protex Series II Wet Chemical Extinguishing System Unit is Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Underwriters Laboratories
of Canada, Inc., and found to comply with UL300, Standard Fire Testing of Fire Protection Systemsfor Protection of Restaurant CookingAreas,
and ULC/ORD-C1254.6-1995.
S
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 1 Part # 10053
Chapter 1 - General Information
NOTES:
S
fl
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 2 Part # 10053
Figure 2-2: Valve Cross Section.
VALVE REBUILDING EQUIPMENT
1. WET VALVE SEAL REBUILDING KIT
(P/N 490420698).
Alter system discharge, the valve assembly must be rebuilt to
ensure proper future operation. The Wet Valve Seal Rebuilding
Kit (P/N 490420698) should be used. It includes all components
necessary to properly rebuild the valve. See Figure 2-3 and Table
2-3.
Prior to assembly, O-rings should be lubricated with Parker
C-Ring Lube (P/N 0R3).
001
Figure 2-3: Wet Valve Seal Rebuilding Kit (P/N 490420698).
Item Part Number Description
1 490420765 Cap & Seat Washer
Sub-Assembly
2 385420705 Conical Spring
3 325420716 Neck 0-Ring
4 325420715 Piston 0-Ring
Table 2-3
Chapter 2 - Components
S CHAPTER II
COMPONENTS
S
CYLINDERS & VALVE
The Protex Series II System has available four different size
cylinders with part numbers L1600, L3000, L4600, and L6000.
Cylinder sizes are expressed in terms of extinguishIng agent
capacity (i.e., the L3000 uses 3.0 gallons of extinguishing
agent). The cylinder is manufactured, tested, and marked in
accordance with DOT 4BW225. Cylinders cc-me pre-filled
with extinguishing agent and are charged wifa dry nitrogen
to a pressure of 225 psig @ 70 F. Cylinder and valve assembly
dimensions are shown in Figure 2-1 and Table 2-1.
Max. Flow Mounting
Point Bracket
Part No. A B C D Capacity Weight Used
L1600 8.00 17.75 23.50 15.44 5 34 lbs. MB,5
L3000 8.00 25.06 30.81 22.75 10 53 lbs. MB15
L4600 50.00 2.o6 30.81 22.75 is 83 lbs. MBt5
L6000 50.00 35.81 41.56 33.50 20 108 lbs. MB,
Table 2-1
Figure 2-1: Cylinder and Valve Assemblies.
All cylinders utilize the same valve assembly (P/N 551175). It
is a pressure sealed poppet type valve designed to provide rapid
actuation and discharge of agent. See Figure 2-2 and Table 2-2.
Item Part Number Description
Valve Body
2 490420765 Cap & Seat Washer Sub-Assembly
3 385420705 Conical Spring
4 490020719 Piston
5 325420716 . Neck Cl-Ring
6 551236 Pressure Gage
7 490020831 Valve Cap & Shrader Valve Assembly
8 325420714 Valve Cap 0-Ring
9 325420715 Piston 0-Ring
10 550985 Pressure Regulator
Table 2-2
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 3
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
0-RING
#8-32 3/8 IN
HOLDING
SCREW
Chapter 2 Components
2. PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
(P/N 550985). Ls CAUTION
11
The pressure regulator assembly is available if the complete
regulator requires replacement (i.e., possible thread damage).
PRESSURE REGULATOR REBUILDING KIT
(P/N 551061).
After system discharge, the pressure regulator must be rebuilt to
ensure proper future operation. The rebuilding kit (P/N 551061)
should be used. It includes all components necessary to proper4
rebuild the regulator. See Figure 2-4.
Prior to assembly, 0-rings should be lubricated with Parker
0-Ring Lube (P/N 0R3).
IN VALVE BODY
Fig 2-4: Regulator Rebuild Kit (P/N 551061)
WET VALVE TOOL (P/N VT!)
The VT1 wet valve tool is designed to facilitate the rebuilding
of the wet valve assembly. It should be used to hold the wet valve
piston while unscrewing the cap and stem assembly. See Figure
2-5.
Be careful when handling and transferring wet agents,
because they are caustic. Wear goggles at all times. If you
get any agent into your eyes, flush them with clean water for
15 minutes and contact a physician. If you get any agent on
your skin, flush it with cold water to prevent irritation. The
agent is electrically conductive. You must clean up all agent
discharged around electrical appliances before you turn the
power back on.
EXTINGUISHING AGENT (PINS RL1600
& RL3000)
The agent used in Protex Series II Systems is a potassium
carbonate based solution that is extremely effective for grease
related kitchen fires. This agent is available for cylinder
recharging in 1.6 and 3.0 Gallon containers (P/Ns RL1600 &
RL3000). After system discharge, agent must be cleaned up
immediately with hot, soapy water to prevent corrosion of affected
surfaces.
MECHANICAL CONTROL HEAD
(P/N MCH2)
The MCH2 Mechanical Control Head is a fully mechanical
control head which can be connected to the L1600,
L3000/4600/6000 cylinder valve. This control head will support
a fusible link detection system, a remote mechanical pull station
(P/N RPSM), and a mechanical or electric gas shut-off valve.
Electrical switches (P/N MSSPDT2, MSDPDT2, MS3PDT2, or
MS4PDT2) can be ordered separately and field installed. There
is no local manual actuation for the MCH2. The MCH2 control
head can actuate a maximum of three (3) cylinders. See Figure
2-6.
fl
vTe if
Figure 2-5: Wet Valve Tool (P/N VT1).
CYLINDER BRACKETING
Vertical bracketing of the L1600, L3000 and L4600 is provided
by the MB15 bracket kit. Vertical bracketing of the L6000 is
provided by the MB1 bracket kit. These kits must be ordered
separately with each cylinder/valve assembly. Cylinder installaticn
instructions are provided in the installation section of this manual.
V UCI2 HS*COS W .0 OUtNSfl4 442'•U SA
Figure 2-6: Mechanical Control Head (P/N MCH2)
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 2 - Components
S MASTER ENCLOSURE (P/N ENMCU2)
The ENMCU2 Master Enclosure is used for vertical mounting
of a single L1600, L3000 or L4600 cylinder. The ENMCU2
Enclosure also includes a mechanical control unit, eliminating the
need for an MCH2 Control Head. See Figure 2-7. The L6000
cylinder cannot be mounted in an ENMCU2 Enclosure.
_ProThxll
S S
28.125
tl
13.125" --*] 4— 10.625"
FRONT SIDE"
Figure 2-7: Enclosure (P/N ENMCU2)
SLAVE ENCLOSURE (P/N ENS)
•
The ENS Enclosure is used for vertical mounting of a single
L1600, L3000 or L4600 cylinder when it is used as a secondary
agent cylinder in a system. The ENS Enclosure has no control
mechanism, and must be used in conjunction with an ENMCU2
Enclosure or an MCH2 Control Head. The L6000 cylinder
cannot be mounted in an ENS Enclosure.
CONTROL HEAD MOUNTING
BRACKET (PIN MBP2)
The MBP2 mounting bracket must be used to mount the MCH2
control head if the control head is not mounted directly on a
cylinder valve. See Figure 2-8.
PNEUMATIC ACTUATING CYLINDER
The PAC100 is a pneumatic actuating cylinder that can actuate a
maximum of ten (10) agent cylinders simultaneously. The PAC100
includes a DOT 4BA350 cylinder pressurized with dry nitrogen
to 350 PSIG @ 70 F., a brass valve with pressure gauge, and a
wall mounting bracket.
An MCH2 control head must be purchased separately and
connected to the PAC100 actuating cylinder to open the valve.
See Figure 2-9.
MCH2 CONTROL--)o-
HEAD I...,ProTexiI (SOLD SEPARATELY)
3/4" DISCHARGE PORT
(OPPOSITE GAUGE) 14.50" 20.25" .pscioo 12.25"
—j 4— 4.00" DIAMETER
Figure 2-9: Pneumatic Actuating Cylinder (P/N PAC100)
Figure 2-8: Control Head Mounting Bracket (P/N MBP2)
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 5
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 2 - Components
DETECTION EQUIPMENT
1. FUSIBLE LINK KIT (P/N 210SH).
The 210SH fusible link kit includes a 10" steel bracket, twD 2)
1/2" EMT connectors, two (2) cable crimps, and two (2)'"S"
hooks. Fusible links must be ordered separately. See Figure 2-10.
2. FUSIBLE LINK HANGER (P/N FLH25).
The FLH25 fusible link hanger is an accessory designed to
simplify the installation of fusible links in the fusible link line. It
can be used with the 210SH fusible link kit (kits must be ordered
separately). The Fusible Link Hanger makes it possible to install
fusible links without cutting and crimping loops in the fusible link
line for each link. See Figure 2-11.
LINK DETECTOR BRACKET(P/N 349)
S-HOOK (P/N 341S)
TERMINAL LINK
1/2" EMT CONNECTOR (P/N 800)
1/16" STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
FUSIBLE LINK
SERIES LINK CABLE CRIMP (P/N 310S)
Figure 2-13: Fusible Link Kit (P/N 210SH)
FUSIBLE LINK
BRACKET
(SOLD
SEPARATELY)
Figure 2-11: Fusible Link Hanger (P/N FLH25)
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 6 Part # 10053
Chapter 2 - Components
3. FUSIBLE LINKS.
The fusible link is designed to separate at a specific temperature,
releasing tension from the fusible link line, causing system
actuation. See Figure 2-12 and Table 2-4.
Figure 2-12: ML Style Fusible Link.
After determining the maximum ambient temperature at the
fusible link location, select the correct fusible link according to the
temperature condition chart below:
Maximum
Ambient
Part No. Temperature
3231 .
3232
95F(35C)
I42F(61C)
3233 21oF(99C)
3234 290 'F (1 ,.3
3235 38O F 093 C)
3236 F (zzr C)
Table 2-4
REMOTE MECHANICAL PULL
STATION (P/N RPSM)
Remote manual control for the MCH2 control head is provided by
the RPSM remote mechanical pull station. It is connected to the
system control head by stainless steel cable. This cable is enclosed
in 1/2" EMT with corner pulleys at each change in direction. The
remote mechanical pull station shall be located at the point Df
egress. See Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13: Mechanical Pull Station (P/N RPSM).
GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
1. MECHANICAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE.
A gas shutoff valve is required on all systems used to protect a
gas fueled cooking appliance to stop gas flow in the event of
system actuation. See Figure 2-14. A mechanical gas valve can be
used with the MCH2 control head. It is connected to the system
control head by stainless steel cable. This cable is enclosed in 1/2"
EMT with a corner pulley at each change in direction. The valves
are rated for natural and LP gas (see Table 2-5). Mechanica gas
valves are available in the following sizes:
Part No Valve Size
Maximum
Operating
Pressure
4075H 3/4' 5 psi
41ooH i5 psi
4125H I1/4" 5 psi
415oH II/2" 5 psi
42ooH 2' S psi
4250 2I/2" 5 psi
4300 3" 5 psi
Table 2-5
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 7
Pag rev. C
Part # 10053
Figure 2-14: 4000-Series Mechanical Gas Valve
2. ELECTRIC GAS SHUTOFF VALVE.
A gas shutoff valve is required on all systems used to protect a gas
fueled cooking appliance to stop gas flow in the event of system
actuation. See Figure 2-15. A UL Listed electric gas valve can
be used with the MCH2 control head. The valves are rated for
natural and LP gas. Valves are available in 120 VAC. Electric gas
valves are available in the following sizes, per Table 2-6:
Part No Valve Size
Maximum
Operating
Pressure
8075 3/4" 50 pSI
8i00 i' 25 psi
8125 1-1/4" 25 psi
810 I1/2" 25 Psi
8200 25 pSI
8250 21/2" 25 psi
8300 25 psi
Table 2-6
Note: A UL Listed manual reset relay is required when using an
electric gas valve. The Protex Series II Reset Relay (P/N 835) may
be used for this purpose. See Figure 2-20.
Chapter 2 - Components
CORNER PULLEYS S
1. SETSCREW PULLEY (P/N 905B).
A corner pulley is used whenever a change in stainless steel cable
direction is required. The 90SB corner pulley is equipped with a
set screw fitting for connection to 1/2' EMT. See Figure 2-16.
Figure 2-16: Corner Pulley (P/N 90SB).
2. COMPRESSION FITTING CORNER PULLEY
(P/N 90KBS).
A corner pulley is used whenever a change in stainless cable
direction is required. The 90KB S corner pulley is a grease-tight
corner pulley designed for areas likely to experience excessive
deposit build-up. It is equipped with a compression fitting for
connection to 1/2" EMT. See Figure 2-17.
Note: The 90KB S corner pulley is not a liquid tight seal for
penetration of hoods and/or ducts.
Figure 2-17: Corner Pulley (P/N 90KBS).
Figure 2-15: Electric Gas Shutoff Valve
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 8 Part # 10053
Chapter 2 - Components
0 TEE PULLEY(P/N 1513)
The 1513 tee pulley is used to connect two mechanical gas valves
or two remote mechanical pull stations to a single control head.
The tee pulley replaces two standard 900 corner pulleys. See
Figure 2-18.
CAUTION
The Tee Pulley must never be used to connect multiple fusible
link lines to a single control head.
Figure 2-18: Tee Pulley (P/N 1513).
S NOTE
All electrical connections must be made in an approved
electrical box on the outside of the control head. The control
head is not an approved electrical box.
ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
The electrical switches are intended for use with electric gas
valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric
power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are
designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated.
NOTE
No electrical connections shall be made inside the control
head. All electrical wiring shall exit the control head
through the knock-out on the side of the box. All electrical
connections must be made in an approved electrical box.
Switches are available in kits: One Switch Kit, Part No.
MSSPDT2; Two Switch Kit, Part No. MSDPDT2; Three
Switch Kit, Part No. MS3PDT2, and Four Switch Kit, Part No.
MS4PDT2. Each switch has a set of single-pole, double-throw(
contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP,
250, 277 VAC. Mounting hardware and 12" wire assemblies are
provided with each kit. See Figures 2-19 and 2-19b
Figure 2-19: Electrical Switch (P/N MSSPDT2).
JUNCTION
BOX
PTOR
Figure 2-19b: Electrical Connection
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 9 Part # 10053
S
NPT
L'HREAD
3/8-18 NPT
FEMALE
THREAD
30°
Rotati
I-RING
/N 325420625)
CAP
(P/N 325420623)
Chapter 2 - Components
RESET RELAY (PIN 835)
Electric gas valve wiring instructions are provided in the
installation section of this manual. See Figure 2-20.
POWER ON
4
SIRE SYSTEM ELECTRIC
GAS VALVE RESET
®USTED
I$*llsr Lo910.6 Inc. consndoguo NY 14424
Figure 2-20. Reset Relay (P/N 835)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
Pipe and fittings must be furnished by the installer. Schedule 40
stainless steel, chrome plated, or black pipe and fittings must be
used. Galvanized pipe and fittings are not to be used.
NOZZLES
Nozzles have been developed for appliance, plenum, and dtct
applications. All nozzles have a specific flow point value and are
supplied with blow-off caps to prevent clogging. Each nozzle is
stamped with the model number. See Figure 2-21 and Tab1 2-7.
Application limitations are provided in the design section of this
manual.
Part No. Description Flow No.
NLIH IH Nozzle
NLIL IL Nozzle
NL2H 2H Nozzle 2
NL2L 2L Nozzle 2
NL2D 2D Nozzle 2
Table 2-7
RETAINING RING (CLIP
_ STRAINER
(P/N 3254206251
H
1 1
NOTE
Protex II Nozzles are marked as shown to include the word
"PYRO".
SWIVEL ADAPTOR (P/N 423572)
The Swivel adaptor consists of a swivel nut, swivel body, and
swivel ball. All are chrome-plated. The swivel adaptor allows the
nozzle to be rotated approximately 30° in all directions. See Figure
2-22.
Figure 2-22: Swivel Adaptor (P/N 423572)
Figure 2-21: Nozzles S
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 Page rev. C 10 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
CHAPTER III
SYSTEM DESIGN
GENERAL a maximum of 34 in. It can also protect a round duct with a
This section will cover the proper design of the Protex Series II maximum diameter of 31-7/8 in.
Restaurant Fire Suppression System. It is divided into four (4)
sections: Two (2)NL2D duct nozzles can protect a square or rectangular
duct with a maximum of 150 in. perimeter, with the longest side
Cylinder Sizing 7 being a maximum of 51 in. They can also protect a round duct
- with a maximum diameter of 47-1/2 in.
Nozzle Coverage and Placement
Piping Limitations
Detector Requirements
Each of these sections must be completly understood before
attempting any installation.
1. SYSTEM CYLINDER SIZING
Each of the nozzles in the section, "Nozzle Coverage and
Placement" has its own flow point value. Each of the four
different agent tanks can support a maximum number of
flowpoints, based on the volume of the pipe used. Select the
S system tank(s) by calculating the total number of flow points
associated with the appliances(s), plenum, and ducts, plus the total
piping volume.
/ CAUTION
Do not exceed the maximum number of flowpoints as shown
on the Tank Chart, page 48. If the number of flow points
or the pipe volume required exceeds the amounts shown,
additional tank(s) or changes in piping design are required.
When two (2) NL2D duct nozzles are used to protect a single
duct, the cross sectional area of the duct must be divided into two
equal symmetrical areas. The nozzle must then be installed on the
centerline of the area it protects and aimed directly into the duct
opening.
The nozzle(s) must be installed on the centerline of the duct, with
the tip located 0 to 6 in. into the opening, and aimed directly into
the duct opening. See Figure 3-1.
0-6 IN.
INTO DUCT
2D NOZZLE
.... . ...
1/2j
-
¶
2. NOZZLE COVERAGE AND
PLACEMENT
This section will provide guidelines for determining nozzle
type, positioning, and quantity for duct, plenum, and apphance
protection.
A. DUCT PROTECTION
L ________
Figure 3-1
ONE-FLOW DUCT PROTECTION WITH 1L NOZZLE
(P/N NL1L)
The 1L Nozzle (P/N NL1L) is capable of protecting square or
rectangular ducts with a maximun perimiter of 50 in. (127 cm.),
with the longest side being a maximum of 17 in. (43.2 cm.). It can
also protect a round duct with a maximum diameter of 16 in. (40.6
cm.) See figures 3-2 & 3-3.
It is not required that the fan be shut down or the exhaust duct
be dampered for the system to operate properly. Each nozzle is
approved to protect exhaust ducts of unlimited length.
Duct protection requires that a nozzle be positioned to discharge 5 up, into the duct. Either a P/N NL1L or a P/N NL2D can be
used. The NL2D duct nozzle is a two (2) flow nozzle. A single
NL2D nozzle is capable of protecting square or rectangular duct
with a maximum of 100 in. perimeter, with the longest side being
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 Page rev. C 11 Part # 10053
Figure 3-7
Chapter 3 - System Design
PERIMETER -'
MEASUREMENT
Figure 3-2: Maximum rectangular duct perimeter of 50"
Figure 3-5
C. MULTIPLE RISERS
In cases of multiple risers, each riser is protected as an individual
duct. See Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-3: Maximum round duct diameter of 16"
TRANSITION DUCTS
The protection of non-standard ducts should be reviewed by the
authority having jurisdiction. Protex Series II recommends that
transition ducts be protected as follows:
PERIMETER -
\__
~TRA.s
MEASUREMENT WA'/
f INTO
ITION
Figure 3-4
TRANSITION DUCTS - LARGER TO SMALLER
In cases where the duct/plenum interface opening is larger than
the final exhaust duct, measure the perimeter/diameter of the duct
halfway between the largest and smallest section (or the average
perimeter/diameter). The nozzle is to be located within 0-6 in. of the
duct/plenum interface (not at the point where the measurement was
taken), centered under the final exhaust duct opening. See Figure
3-4.
TRANSITION DUCTS - SMALLER TO LARGER
In cases where the duct/plenum interface opening is smaller than
the final exhaust duct, measure the perimeter/diameter of the final
exhaust duct. The nozzle(s) is to be located within 0-6 in. of the
duct/plenum interface, centered in the opening. See Figure 3-5.
JCT
PLENUM
Fig 3-6
ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR
Ducts utilizing electrostatic precipitators must be protected
above and below the unit. Standard duct nozzles are used in this
application. See Figure 3-7.
S
S
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 12 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Figure
3-8.
YN
V-BANK
SINGLE BANK
S B. PLENUM PROTECTION
The NL1H nozzle is a one (1) flow nozzle used for plenum
protection. A single NL1H nozzle can protect a plenum (with
single or V-bank filters) 10 ft. long by 4 ft. wide. Dividing the
length into sections equal to or less than 10 ft. in length and
positioning a nozzle at the start of each section can be done to
protect longer plenums.
On V-bank plenums, the nozzle(s) must be located at the center
of the V-bank width, 1/3 of the vertical height of the filters. On
single filter bank plenums, the nozzle must be located 2 in. from
the back edge of the filter, 1/3 down from the vertical height.
For either application, the nozzle must be located within 6 in. of
the end of the plenum (or module) and aimed directly down th
length of the plenum. See Fig. 3-8.
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 13 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
NOTES: C
S
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 14 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
S C. APPLIANCE PROTECTION to or smaller than single nozzle coverage. Exception: Fryers must
Note: When protecting appliances which are larger than single not exceed a maximum of 864 sq. in. For modularizing fryers,
nozzle coverage, multiple nozzles can be used. refer to "Protecting Large Fryers by Dividing Their Area Into
Modules," page 22.
Larger appliances can be divided into several modules, each equal
Design Index Chart and Nozzle Coverage Summary Sheet
Min Max
Max Max Max Nozzle Nozzle
Nozzle Flow Depth Length Area Height Height
Appliance - - -
Mount Figure Type Points Max Width (in) (in) (in) (in') (in) (in)
Deep Fat Fryer -Vat H 3-3 NL2H 2 19-1/2 19 24 48
Deep Fat Fryer - Vat L 3-4 NL2L 2 19-1/2 19 13 24
Deep Fat Fryer w/ drip board H 3-5 NL2H 2 Deep Vat 27-3/4 324 24 48
(Condition 1) Overall Cooking Area 18 500 24 48
Deep Fat Fryer w/ drip board H 3-5 NL2H 2 Deep Vat 19-1/2 371 24 48
(Condition 2)
- -
Overall Cooking Area 25-3/8 495 24 48
Deep Fat Fryer w/ drip board L 3-5 NL2L 2 Deep Vat 18 324 13 24
(Condition 1) Overall Cooking Area 27-3/4 500 13 24
Deep Fat Fryer w/ drip board L 3-5 NL2L 2 Deep Vat 19-1/2 371 13 24
(Condition 2) Overall Cooking Area 25-3/8 495 13 24
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan H 3-7 NL2H 2 27-3/4 500 24 48
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan L
- 3-8 NL2L 2 27-3/4 500 13 24
Four Burner Range 3-9 NL2L 2 28 28 34 48
Two Burner Range H 3-10 NL1H 1 12 28 40 50
Burner Range L 3-11 NL1L 1 12 28 13 24 S Two
Two Burner Range H 3-11b NL2L 2 12 28 24 35
Small Wok H 3-12 NL1H 1 24" dia. 6 24 48
Small Wok L - 3-13 NL1L 1 24" dia. 6 13 24
Large Wok H 3-14 NL2H 2 30" dia. 8 24 48
Large Wok L 3-15 NL2L 2 30' dia. 8 13 24
Small Griddle H 3-16 NL1H 1 36 1080 24 48
Small Griddle L 3-17 NL1L 1 36 1080 10 24
Large Griddle H 3-18 NL2H 2 48 1440 24 48
Large Griddle L 3-19 NL2L 2 48 1440 10 24
Gas Radiant Char-Broiler H 3-20 NL1H 1 26 624 24 48
Gas Radiant Char-Broiler L 3-21 NL1L 1 26 624 13 24
Large Gas Radiant Char-Broiler H 3-22 NL2H 2 36 864 36 48
Large Gas Radiant Char-Broiler L
-
3-23 NL2L 2 36 864 13 36
Lava Rock Char-Broiler H 3-24 NL2L 2 26 624 24 35
Lava Rock Char-Broiler L
-
3-25 NL2L 2 26 624 15 24
Natural Charcoal Char-Broiler H 3-26 NL1H 1 24 480 24 35
(max. fuel depth 6")
-
Natural Charcoal Char-Broiler L - 3-27 NL1L 1 24 480 15 24
Mesquite Char-Broiler H 3-28 NL1H 1 24 480 24 35
(max. fuel depth 6')
Mesquite Char-Broiler L 3-29 NL1L 1 24 480 15 24
Upright/Salamander Broiler 3-30 NL1L 1 36 28 Front Edge
-
above the grate
Chain Broiler (Internal Chamber) 3-31 NL1L 1 27 38 Front Edge 1-3"
above the chain
Plenum Single Bank / V Bank H NL1H 1 48 120 0-6" from end of
plenum
Duct Perim. Diameter
-
(in)
Rectangular/Circular Duct - NL2D 2 34 no limit 100 31-7/8
Rectangular/Circular Duct NL1L 1 17 50 16
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 15
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Fryers Without Drip Board (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
(no drip board)
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming,
Graphic Representation.
NL2H
2 (Two)
1 (One)
19 inches x 19-1/2 inches
Anywhere over the cooking surface.
24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
See figure 3-3
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Figure 3-3
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 16 Part # 10053
S
Chapter 3 - System design
S Fryers Without Drip Board (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 19 inchesx 19-1/2 inches
-
(no drip board)
Nozzle Location Anywhere or the perimeter of :he cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 13 inches itc 24 inches above the cooking surfaze.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the cooking srface.
Graphic Representation See figu 3-4 -
S
S
Figure 3-4 -
-
- - Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 17 Part # 10053
LONGEST
SIDE
DIMENSION
(DEEP VAT)
Condition 2
Chapter 3 - System Design
S Fryers with Drip Board (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection
Condition 1
Deep Vat Cooking Area 324 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 18 inches.
(excludes drip board)
Overall Cooking Area 500 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 27-3/4 inches.
(includes drip board)
Condition 2
Deep Vat Cooking Area 371 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 19-1/2 inches.
(excludes drip board)
Overall Cooking Area 495 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 25-3/8 inches.
(includes drip board)
Nozzle Location Anywhere over the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Graphic Representation See Figure 3-5
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
AMMD DATT
S
500 SQUARE
/INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING
AREA
4. 24"
0 SQUARE
0 INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING
AREA
371 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
DEEP VAT
1>
AREA
'LONGEST DRIPBOARD SIDE
DIMENSION
(DEEP VAT)
Figure 3-5
18
DRIPROARD
Condition 1
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006
COOKING AREA
LONGEST SIDE
DIMENSION
27-3/4"
324 SQUARJ
INCHES -
MAXIMUM
DEEP VAT
AREA
S
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
OVERALL
COOKING AREA
LONGEST SIDE
DIMENSION
324 SQUARI
INCHES -
MAXIMUM
DEEP VAT
AREA
DRIPBOARD LONGEST
SIDE
DIMENSION
(DEEP VAT)
Coidition 2
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Fryers with Drip Board (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL21,
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection
Condition 1
Deep Vat Cooking Area 324 square inches with a maximum longest side dirne:sion of 18 inches.
(excludes drip board)
Overall Cooking Area 500 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 27-3/4 inches.
(includes drip board)
Condition 2
Deep Vat Cooking Area 371 square in.:hes with a maximum lc-ngest side dimision of 19-1/2 inches.
(excludes drip board)
Overall Cooking Area 495 square inhe with a maximum lcngest side diaaesion of 25-3/8 inches.
(includes drip board)
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-6
Nozzle must be located anywhere &n the perimeter cf the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooRinz surface.
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006
OVERALL
COOKING AREA
LONGEST SIDE 495 SQUARE
DIMENSION - INCHES
25-3/8" I MAXIMUM
I COOKING
AREA
L[NN
371 SQUAFJ
INCHES -
MAXIMUM
DEEP VAT
AREA
18'
LONGEST DRIPBOAJ
SIDE
DIMENSION
(DEEP VAT)
Figure 3-6
19
S Condition 1
500 SQUARE
/ IN CE ES
MAXIMUM
Coo:KING
AREA
4" I
13"f
Chapter 3 - System Design
Note
Tilt skillets or
braising pans
generally use a
hinged cover.
Nozzle(s) are
to be placed at
the front edge
of the appliance
cooking area to
minimize the
potentialfor
the tilt skillet
or braising
Pan cover to
interfere with
the nozzle
discharge. See
Note, below.
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan (High Mount Nozzle) S
Compulsory Nozzle NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (one)
Maximum Area of Protection 500 square inches with a maximum longest side dimension of 273/4
inches
Nozzle Location Positioned near the front edge of the pan. The nozzle(s) must be
completely clear of the pan cover with an unobstructed view to the back
of the pan.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the front to back centerline of the pan.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-7
Modularized Coverage 2. Divide the cooking area into modules, each
Tilt Skillets and Braising Pans generally require of which can be protected by a single nozzle
modularized coverage. Use the following steps to as specified in the
determine modular coverage: design chart.
1. Measure the length and width of the Tilt 3. Ensure that no single nozzle exceeds its
Skillet/Pan cooking area. limitations for area or longest side
Nozzle must be located anywhere along thefront edge of the cooking area, S
and aimed at the center of the cookinp area.
Note
The nozzle must be completely clear of the pan cover,
with an unobstrocted flow to the back of the pan.
)
I\J1
MAXIMUM
LONGEST SIDE
DIMENSION
500 SQUARE
(I
INCHES MAXIMUM
COOKING SURFACE
S
Figure 3-7
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 20 Part # 10053
Chap:er 3 - System lesign
Note
Tilt skillets or
braising pans
generally use a
hinged cover.
Nozzle(s) are
to be placed at
thefront edge
of the appliance
cooking area to
minimize the
potentialfor
the tilt skillet
or braising
Pan cover to
interfere with
the nozzle
discharge. See
Note, below.
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL2L
Tow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
NLrrtber of Nozzles Required 1 (one)
Ma %.-: mum Area of Protection 500 square inches with a niaxim'Jm longest side dimension of 273/4
inches
Nozzle Location Positioned near the fr.on: edgs of the pan. The nozzle(s) must be
completely clear cfth part c•cvs: with an unobstructed view to the back
of the pan.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 24 irche above :he ccoking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the front to back cenrline of the pan.
.GraphEc Representation See figure 3-
Modularized Coverage 2. Divide the cooking area into modules, each
c-f which can be protected by a single nozzle Tilt Sllets anl Braising Pans generally require
. as: spscified in the modularized coverage. Use the following steps to assign chart. determine mou1ar -:overage:
1. Mecre the length and width of the Tilt 3. Ensure that no single nozzle exceeds its
Skst/Pn ccoting area. litr.itations for area or longest side
Nozzie must be licated anywhere along thefront edge of the cook&ig area,
and aimed at the center of the cocking area.
40, f'A -
f/fl
Note
The nozzle must )e completely clear of the pan cover,
with an unobsirocte flow to the back of the pan.
)
.-
-
:
- - 500 SQUARE INCHES
27~' MAXIMUM COOKING
MAXIMUM SURFACE
LONGEST SIDE
DIMENSION
Figure 3-8
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 21 Part # 10053
S
Chapter 3 — System Design
Protecting Large Fryers by Dividing Their Area Into Modules
When protecting fryers larger than those previously described,
the area requiring protection can be divided into modules. In the
standard fryer protection coverages, you will notice that a fryer
without a drip board has a larger vat area than a fryer with a drip
board. While very specific limitations apply, a larger fryer that
requires modular protection could include both circumstances: a
portion of the fryer with a drip board and a portion of the fryer
without a drip board. Dividing the modules into either deep
vat only or deep vat with drip board can maximize the modular
coverage.
Note: The maximum size of a fryer that can be modularized is
864 square inches (6 square feet).
If the fryer has no drip board, use design charts 3-3 or 3-4
depending on whether the appliance is a high or low mount
application. As the fryer does not have a drip board, the
maximum overall cooking area will be the same as the maximum
deep vat area. Use the following steps to determine the modular
coverage;
Measure the internal length and width of the deep vat.
Ensure the total area to be protected does not exceed
864 square inches (6 square feet).
Divide the deep vat into modules, each of which can be
protected by a single nozzle as specified in the design
chart.
Ensure that no single nozzle exceeds its limitations for
area or longest side
If the fryer contains a drip board use the design charts 3-5 or
3-6 for fryers depending on whether the appliance is a high or
low mount application. Use the following steps to determine the
modular coverage;
Measure the internal length and width of the deep vat.
Measure the internal length and width of the hazard
area including drip board area.
Ensure the total area to be protected does not exceed
864 square inches (6 square feet).
Divide the deep vat into modules, each of which can be
protected by a single nozzle as specified in the design
charts.
Note
None of the maximum dimensions may be exceeded. If
either the maximum vat or overall sizes are exceeded, the
area divided into modules will need to be redefined with the
possibility of an additional nozzle.
26 26032=832 sq. in. EXAMPLE 1
,. 8z = 2.56 nozzles
32 324 longest side: 273/4"No
t
drip board 2. 832 = 2.24 nozzles
, longest side: 25/8"
Use #1 because it meets the longest side
4— 26" —p Startfrom the back of
the vat, andfigure the
12 ,, 0 opposite side
1.4 = 22.46"
12.46t _ _
Old method
26 would have
7.08 " 0 required 4
nozzles
.4— — Or you could just 26" _p .4— z6"
______________
I I equally divide the three t 0 I I sections in io.66" each
;6,F ------
32 0 0
10
I
—I I
Z
- - I
I I
io6f 0
__
i 01
4— 24" — 24030720 sq. in. EXAMPLE 2
2. 720 = 2.22 nozzles
324 longest side: 27/4" (with drip soo sq. in.)
3°
I 2. 720 = 2.9 nozzles
371 longest side: 253/8" (with drip 495 sq.in.)
6" Use #2 because it meets the longest side
and requires fewer nozzles
Startfrom the back of the vat, andJlgure the
opposite side
372 sq.in. = 25.45 in.
24 in. longest side: 273/4"
(with drip soo sq.in.)
24015.45 = 370.8 sq. in.
24024.55 = 349.2
4— 24" —p..
4 0 '5.45" 30
I '4.55 0
6"
If the module does not include any portion of the drip board, the
maximum overall cooking area will be the same as the maximum
deep vat area in the design chart.
If the module includes any portion of the drip board, the
maximum deep vat area and overall cooking area limitations must
be adhered to.
Old method
would have
required 4
nozzles
0
0
Now you need to include the drip board
+ 6" = 20.55"
24" 0 20.55" = 493.2 sq. in.
This does not exceed allowable sq. in. of 495
(included in our Set ofnumbers)
2 nozzles would cover this fryer S
324 sq. in.; 273/4" longest side; maximum area with drip-500 sq. in.
372 sq. in.; 251/4" longest side; maximum area with drip-495 sq. in.
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 22 Part # 10053
Two Burner Range (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 12 inches x 28 inches
Nozze Location Center of the cooking surface only
Nozzle Height 40 inches to 50 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Directly down only.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-10
S
Note
The range
cannot be under
a backshelf
when using
high-mount
protection.
Chapter 3 - System Design
S Nozzle must be !oc2ted (heigbtwse) anywhere within the shaded area, 1
L and centered above the cooking surface.
Figure 3-10
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 23 . Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Four Burner Range S
Note
The range
cannot be under
a backshelf
when using
high mount
protection.
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL2L
2 (Two)
1 (One)
28 inches x 28 inches
Center of the cooking surface only.
34 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Directly down only.
See figure 3-9
Example: A four burner range has a hazard size of 20 in. (51 cm) in length and 27 in. (69
cm) in width. Follow down the Range Length column in the Nozzle Positioning Chart until
you come to 20 in. (51 cm). Continue down this column until the correct width appears in
the width column. When the width of 27 in. (69 cm) is arrived at, read across to the radius
column to determine the size of radius allowed, for positioning of the nozzle, from the hazard
area centerline. In this example, the correct radius is 3 in. (8 cm). The nozzle can be aimed
straight down anywhere within a 3 in. (8 cm) radius of the hazard area centerline.
- Nozzle must be located (heightwise)anywhere within the shaded area,
- and centered above the cooking surface.
4
Figure 3-9
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 24 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 — System Design
Nozzle Positioning Chart for Four Burner Range
RANGE RANGE WIDTH RADIUS
LENGTH 'L' 'W' lie
in. (cm) in. (cm) in.
IS (46) 18 ( 7½
18 (46) 19 (48) 63/4
18 (46) 20 (si) 6'/8
18 (46) 21 (si) 6
18 (46) 22 (6) 5'/8
18 (46) f 23 (8) 51/4
18 (46) 24 (61) 43/4
18 (46) 25 (64) 4/8
iS (46) 26 (66) 4
18 (46) 27 (69) J 3/8
iS (46) 28 (ii) 3½
19 (48) 18 (46) 63/4
19 (48) 19 (48) 6/8
19 (48) 20 (ii) 6
19 (48) 21 (s) 55/8
19 (48) 22 (56) 5¼
19 (48) 23 (8) 438
19 (48) 24 (61) 4½
19 (48) 25 (64) 4½
19 (48) 26 (66) 33/4
19 (48) 27 (69) 31/4
19 (48) 28 (ii) 2Y8
20 (ii) 18 (46) 6'/s
20 (si) 19 (48) 6
20 (si) 20 (s') 55/8
20 (si) zi ()
20 (51) 22 (6) 438
20 (51) 23 (8) 41h
20 (ii) 24 (61) 4½
20 (si) f 25 (64) 33/4
20 (5') 26 (66) 33/8
20 (51) 27 (69) 3
20 (si) 28 (yr) 25/8
21 (s) 18 (46) 6
21 (s) 19 (48) 5%
21 () 20 () 14
21 (53) 21 ()
21 (53) 22 (6) 45/8
21 (si) 23 (8) 4¼
21 () 24 (61) 3Y8
21 (53) 25 (64) 3½
RANGE
LENGTH 'L'
in. (cm)
RANGE WIDTH
'W'
in. (cm)
RADIUS
'R'
in. (cm)
21 (53) 26 (66) 3½ (8)
21 (ii) 1 27 (69) I 23/8 ()
21 () 28 (ii) 2¼ (6)
22 (6) 18 (46) % (,)
22 (6) 19 (48) 5Y4 (is)
22 (6) 20 (i,) 4Y8 (12)
22 (6) 21 (si) 45/8 (II)
22 (6) 22 (6) 41/4 (io)
22 (6) 23 (8) 3Y8 (io)
22 (6) 24 (61) 3½ (c')
22 (56) 25 (64) 3½ (8)
22 (6) 26 (66) 23/4 ()
22 (6) 27 (69) 23/8 (6)
22 (6) 28 (n) 2 ()
23 (8) J 18 (46) 5¼ (13)
23 (8) 19 (48) 4Y8 (iz)
23 (8) 20 (s,) 41h (II)
23 (8) 21 () 41/4 (ro)
23 (8) 22 (6) 3Y8 (io)
23 (8) 23 (8) 3½ ()
23 (8) 24 (61) 3½ (8)
23 (8) 25 (64) 2N ()
23 (8) 26 (66) 21/2 (6)
23 (8) 27 (69) 2½ (s)
23 (8) 28 (ri) ,'/8 ()
24 (61) 18 (46) 43/4 (12)
24 (61) 19 (48) 41/2 (II)
24 (61) 20 (ii) 41/8 (io)
24 (61) 21 () 3Y8 (io)
24 (61) 22 (6) 31h ()
24 (61) 23 (8) 3½ (8)
24 (61) 24 (61) 2Y8 ()
24 (61) 25 (64) 2½ (6)
24 (61) 26 (66) 2½ (s)
24 (61) 27 (69) r3/4 ()
24 (61) 28 (ri) IN ()
25 (64) 18 (46) 4' (")
25 (64) 19 (48) 4½ (io)
25 (64) 20 (51) 33/4 (10)
25 (64) 21 () 3½ (9)
25 (64) 22 (6) 3½ (8)
RANGE RANGE WIDTH RADIUS
LENGTH 'L' 'W' 'R'
in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
25 1 (64) 23 (ES) 278 (7)
25 (64) 24 (61) 2½ (6)
25 (64) 25 (64) 2½ (5)
25 (64) 26 (66) 13/4 ()
25 (64) 27 (69) 13/8 ()
25 (64) 28 ('i) r (2)
26 (66) 18 (46) 4 (io)
26 (66) i (48) 33/4 (io)
26 (66) 20 (i,) 33A ()
26 (66) 21 (s) 3½ (8)
26 (66) 22 (6) 23/4 (7)
26 (66) 23 (8) 21h (6)
26 (66) 24 (61) 2½ (s)
26 (66) 25 (64) 13/4 ()
26 (66) 26 (66) 13/8 ()
26 (66) 27 (69) r (z)
26 (66) 28 (ri) 3/4 (2)
27 (69) 18 (46) 08 ()
27 (69) 19 (48) 3¼ (8)
27 (69) 20 (51) 3 (8)
27 (69) 21 (si) 23/4 ()
27 (69) 22 (6) J z% (6)
27 (69) 23 (8 z½ ()
27 (69) 24 (61) i3/4 ()
27 (69) 25 (64) 13/8 ()
27 (69) 26 (66) i (2)
27 (69) 27 (69) 3/4 (2)
27 (69) 28 ('i) 3/8 (1)
28 (ii) 18 (46) 3½ (8)
28 (',) 19 (48) 278 ()
28 (71) 20 (51) 2% ()
28 (ii) 21 () 21/4 (6)
28 ('i) 22 (6) 2 (s)
28 (yr) 23 (8) i% ()
28 (ii) 24 (61) ,% ()
28 (v,) 25 (64) i (2)
28 (ii) 26 (66) 3/4 (2)
28 (ii) 27 (69) 3/8 (I)
28 (70 28 (ii) 0 (o)
(cm)
(i8)
('7)
(i6)
(Is)
('4)
('3)
(12)
('I)
(io)
(9)
(8)
('7)
(i6)
('5)
('4)
('3)
(12)
(I')
(io)
(9)
(8)
(7)
(i6)
('5)
(14)
('3)
(12)
(II)
(io)
(9)
(8)
(7)
(6)
(15)
('4)
('3)
(12)
(I')
(io)
(io)
(9)
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 25 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Note
If the range has
a backshelf the
nozzle has to
be equal to or
below the height
of the shelf
and be within
limitations
of the nozzle
height.
Two Burner Range (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 12 inches x 28 inches
Nozzle Location 22 inches from the opposite edge of the hazard area and centered right
to left.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 23½ inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at a point equal to one half of the nozzle height above the
appliance and along the right-left centerline.
Example: If the nozzle was mounted 23 inches above the cooking surface, the
aiming point would be 11112 inches from the opposing edge of the appliance
on which the nozzle is located. See illustrations Example 1 and Example 2
below.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-11
Nozzle must be located ('heightwise) anywhere within the shaded area, S
and located on the left-right center line above the cooking surface.
VARIES-
SEE
NOZZLE
AIMING
AND
EXAMPLES
1&2
22"
13" 23½"
EXAMPLE 1
Nozzle is 13"
above surface &
aimed 61/2" from
opposite edge of
cooking surface.
(13/2=6½)
EXAMPLE 2
28" Nozzle is 23"
12" 0 above surface
& aimed 111/2"
from rear of
cooking surface.
(23/2=11½)
Figure 3-11
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 26 Part # 10053
I
Chapter 3 - System design
10 Two Burner Range with. High Proximity Backshelf Protection (Low Mount Nozzle)
Coripuhory Nozzle NL2L
F'lcw Pcirtts Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
.Maximum Area of Protection 12 inches x 28 inches
Nczzle Location Over the front edge of :he front bLrner; on the front-to-rear center line.
No -zleHight 24 inches to 35 inches above thie :ookhg surface
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at a point 10 inches b:wird frcni the back burner on the front-
to-rear center line
Graphic ReFresentation - See figure 3-11b
Jozzle must be located over t!efront edge oftiefront burner, oriented with the nozzle to aid on thefront-to-back centerline
ar4imed 10 inches iorward of the back burner on thefroit-tc-back center line. -
Figure 3-11b
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 27 Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Small Wok (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1H
1 (One)
1 (One)
24 inches maximum diameter and 6 inches maximum depth.
Anywhere on the perimeter of the Wok.
24 inches to 48 inches above the top edge of the Wok.
Directly at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
See figure 3-12
Nozzle must be located anywhere along the perimeter of the Wok, S
and aimed at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
S
Figure 3-12
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 28 Part # 10053
Chap:er 3 - System design
S Small Wok (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Heig,t
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Rep:esentation
NL1L
1 (One)
1(One)
24 inches rnaximu:n diameter and 6 inches mamum ep-m.
Anywhere on the perimeter of the Wok.
13 inches to 24 inches above the top edge of the Wok.
Directly at the center of the inside bottow f the Wok.
See figure 3-13 V
S Nozzle must be located anywAere eiIong the perimeter of the Wok,
and aimed at the center of tr.e inside oortmcJthe Jhk -
Figure 343:
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 29 Pa--t # 1)053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Large Wok (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL2H
2 (Two)
1 (One)
Greater than 24 inches diameter to 30 inches in diameter and 8 inches maximum
depth.
Anywhere on the perimeter of the Wok.
24 inches to 48 inches above the top edge of the Wok.
Directly at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
See figure 3-14
Nozzle must be located anywhere along the perimeter of the Wok,
and aimed at the center of the inside bottom of the Wok.
Figure 3-14
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 30 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
S Large Wok (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compuls3ry Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection Greater than 24 inc1ie5 diameter to 30 inches It: hiaere: ad 8 inches maximum
depth.
Nozzle Location Anywhere: on the perimeter of the Wok.
Nozzle Heiht 13 inches o 24 inches above the top edge of he Wok.
Nozzle Aiming Directly at the center of the inside bottom of :he Woe.
Graphic Represerntion See figure 3-15
S r Nozzle must be located anywber along the perimeter fiLe
and .aimed at We center cif the inside PottGm of the E'" - -
S
Fige 1-15
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 31 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Small Griddle (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1H or NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One) NL1H or 2 (Two) NL2H
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One) NL1H or 1 (One) NL2H
Maximum Area of Protection 1080 square inches with a longest side dimension of 36 inches
Nozzle Location NL1H: Above any corner of the cooking surface.
NL2H: 0 to 6 in. from either of the short sides of the cooking surface
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming NL1H: At a point 12 inches in and 12 inches over from the corner below the nozzle.
NL2H: At the center of the cooking surface
Graphic Representation See figures 3-16a &3-16b
NL1HNozzle must be located directly above any corner of the cooking surface
and aimed at the intersecting point 12 inchesfrom each side of the corner below the nozzle.
NL2H Nozzle must be located 0 to 6 inchesfrom either of the short sides of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center oftbe cooking surface - -
_T
I' 'AN BE
MOUNTED ABOVE
4. ANYCORNER
1080 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING AREA
/41 SHORT
SIDE OF
COOKING
SURFACE
Figure 3-16a: 1WLg1iH Ndf11NL2H Nozzle
48"
NOZZLE
CAN BE
MOUNTED
AT EITHER
END
6"
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 32 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
Small Griddle (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1L or NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One) NL11, or 2 (Two) NL21,
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One) NL1L or 1 (One) NL21,
Maximum Area of Frutctic.n 1080 square inches with a longest side dimension of 36 inches
Nozzle Location NL1L: Above any corner of the cooking surface.
NL2L: 0 to 6 in. from either of the shor: sides of the cooking surface
Nozze Height 10 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming NL1L: At a point 12 inches in and 12 irihes over from the corner below the nozzle.
-
NL2L: At the center of the cooking surface
Graphic Represectation See figures 3-17a & 3-17b
NL1L Nozzle n.ist be located directly above any corner of the cooking surface
and aimed at the inteseding point 12 inchesfrom each side of the corner below the nozzle.
NL2L Nozzle ust be located 0 to 6 inchesfrom either of the short sides of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface
-
Tit
NOZZLE CAN BE
___X- MOUNTED ABOVE
T ANYCORNER
NOZZLE
CAN BE
MOUNTED
AT EITHER
END
2" 1"
6'
S
1080 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING AREA
SHORT
SIDE OF ..
COOKING
SURFACE
Figure 3-171: NL1L Nozzle
UL EX4521 December 12, 200 33
Figure 3-17b: NL21, Nozzle
Page rev. C
Part# 10053
Ll
S
Chapter 3 - System Design
Large Griddle (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 1440 square inches with a longest side dimension of 48 inches
Nozzle Location Above any corner of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming At a point 12 inches in and 12 inches over from the corner below the nozzle.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-18
Nozzle must be located directly above any corner of the cooking surface and aimed at
the intersecting point 12 inchesfrom each side of the corner below the nozzle.
I'
I'
I'
48"
NOZZLE CAN BE
MOUNTED ABOVE
ANY CORNER
48"
LONGEST
SIDE
DIMENSION
1440 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING AREA S
Figure 3-18
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 34 Part # 10053
S
S
Chapter 3 - System design
[ Large Griddle (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compuisory Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 1440 qLare inches with a longest side dimension of 48 inches
Nozzle Location Above any corner of the cooking surface.
Nczzle Height 10 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming At a point 12 inches in and 12 inches over from the corner below the nozzle.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-19
S Nozzle must be located directy above any corner of the cooking surface and aimed aT 1
the intersethngpoint 12 inchesfro!rz each side of the corner below the nozzle.
I - NOZZLE CAN BE
TN
MOLIVTEI) A30VE
ANY CORNER
LONGEST
DIMENSION
1440 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING AREA
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
Fiire 3-19
35
Page rev. C
Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Small Gas Radiant Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle) S
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1H
1 (One)
1 (One)
624 square inches with a longest side dimension of 26 inches.
Anywhere over the cooking surface.
24 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the broiler.
See figure. 3-20
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
Figure 3-20
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 36 Part # 10053
S
Chapter 3 - System design
S Small Gas Radiant Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 One)
Maximum Area of Protection 624 square inches with a longest side dimensior of 26 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-21
S I Nozzle must be located anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surf3c.
Figure 3-21
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 37
Page rev. C
Part# 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Large Gas Radiant Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle) S
Compulsory Nozzle NL2H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 864 square inches with a longest side dimension of 36 inches
Nozzle Location Above any corner of the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 36 inches to 48 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-22
Nozzle must be located directly above any corner of the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. -
NOZZLE CAN BE
MOUNTED ABOVE
ANY CORNER
864 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING
AREA
Figure 3-22
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 38 Part # 10053
S
S
Chapter 3 - System design
S Large Gas Radiant Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsc.ry Nozzle N. 2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 :One
Maximum Area of Protection 864 square inches with a longest side dimension of 36 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the cocking surface.
Nozzle Height 13 inches to 36 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-23
Nozzle must be located anywhere on the perimeter 6f the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
LONGEST 864 SQUARE
:SIDE INCHES
DIMENSION MAXIMUM
COOKING
S AREA
Figure 3-23
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 39 Part # 10053
I
Chapter 3 - System Design
Lava Rock Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle) S
Compulsory Nozzle NL2L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 2 (Two)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 624 square inches with a longest side dimension of 26 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere over the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 35 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-24
S Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
S
Figure 3-24
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 40 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
S Lava Rock Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Prote:tbn
Nozzle Locatbn
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aimiflg
Graphic Representation
NL2L
2 (Two)
1 (One)
624 square inches with a longest side dimension of 26 inches
Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
15 inches to 24 inches above he cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the brc-ier.
See f:gure 3-25
C
Figure 3-25
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 41 Part # 10053
I
)FFUEL
DAL) MUST
DEED
S
Chapter 3 - System Design
Nuri1 Charcoal Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Fuel Depth (Charcoal)
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1H
1 (One)
1 (One)
480 square inches with a longest side dimension of 24 inches
Must not exceed 6 inches
Anywhere over the cooking surface.
24 inches to 35 inches above the cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the broiler.
See figure 3-26
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface.
S
Figure 3-26
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 42 Part # 10053
Naturrl Charcoal Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle NL1L
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 480 square inches with a longest si:le dim.n;ion of 24 inches
Fuel Depth (Charcoal) Must not exceed 6 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere on the perimeter of the :coking surface.
Nozzle Height 15 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-27
Nozzle must be located anywhere on the perimeterf the cooking surface,
and aimed at the center of the cooking- surface.
Chap:er 3 - System design
480 SQUARE
INCHES
MAXIMUM
COOKING
AREA
MAXIMUM
DEPTH OF FUEL
(CHARCOAL) MUST
NOT EXCEED
6 INCHES
LONGEST
SIDE
DIMENSION
Figure 3-27
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 43 Page rev. C
Part# 10053
M DEPTH
(WOOD)
)T
6 INCHES
Chapter 3 - System Design
Mesquite Char-Broiler (High Mount Nozzle) [I
Compulsory Nozzle NL1H
Flow Points Per Nozzle 1 (One)
Number of Nozzles Required 1 (One)
Maximum Area of Protection 480 square inches with a longest side dimension of 24 inches,
Fuel Depth (Wood) Must not exceed 6 inches
Nozzle Location Anywhere over the cooking surface.
Nozzle Height 24 inches to 35 inches above the cooking surface.
Nozzle Aiming Aimed at the center of the broiler.
Graphic Representation See figure 3-28
L_
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. U
S
Figure 3-28
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 44 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
S Mesquite Char-Broiler (Low Mount Nozzle)
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Fuel Depth (Wood)
Nozzle Location.
Nozzle Height
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1L
1 (One)
1(One)
480 square inches with a longest side dimension of 24 inches
Must not exceed 6 inches
Anywhere on the perimeter of the cooking surface.
15 inches to 24 inches above the cooking surface.
Aimed at the center of the broiler.
See figure 329
hi
Figure 3-29
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 45 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Upright/Salamander Broiler
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Per Nozzle
Number of Nozzles Required
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NL1L
1 (One)
1 (One)
Internal chamber of 36 inches wide by 28 inches deep.
Above the grate at the front edge of the broiler.
Aimed at the back opposite corner of the broiler chamber, and pointed parallel to the
broiler grate.
See figurt 3-30
Nozzle must be located at thefront of the broiler above the grate, pointedparallel to the broiler grate,
and aimed at the diagonally opposite corner
Fj
S
Figure 3-30
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 46 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System design
S Chain Broiler
Compulsory Nozzle
Flow Points Pe: Nozzle
Number of Nozzles ReqLired
Maximum Area of Protection
Nozzle Location
Nozzle Aiming
Graphic Representation
NLIL -.
1 (One)
1(One)
Internal chamber of 27 inches wide b 38
1 to 3 inches above the surface of the chain al the front edge of the broiler.
Aimed at the back opposite corner of ihe koiler chaniber, and pointed parallel to the chain
surface.
See figure 3-31
Nozzle must be located anywhere within the shaded area,poizted parallelt the chain surface,
and aimed
S
NOZZ
1-31N(
CHAR
TO SU
NOZZLE AIMED
AT DIAGONALLY
OPPOSITE
CORNER
Figure 3-31
- Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 47, Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
PIPING LIMITATIONS
Volume Chart
1/4 in. pipe = 20.5 mls./ft.
3/8 in. pipe = 37.5 mls./ft.
1/2 in. pipe = 59.8 mls./ft.
3/4 in. pipe = 105.0 mls./ft.
For more Pipe Volume data, see page 52
TANK CHART
Maximum Maximum Volume
Maximum Pipe Allowed Between
Flow Volume First Nozzle & Last
Tank Size Numbers (milliliters) Nozzle (milliliters)
1.6 Gallon 5 1500 600
L,600
3.0 Gallon to 1910 1125
L3000
4.6 Gallon 14 3400 3000
L4600
4.6 Gallon 15 2600 2000
L4600
6.o Gallon 59 4215 1688/side
L6000
6.o Gallon 20 3465 1313/side
L6000
MINIMUM PIPE VOLUMES FOR A
FRYER, RANGE, AND WOK
Cylinder
Size Entire System Atorbefore appliance
L1600 239 ml—, Flow Pt i8o ml—, Flow Pt
L3000 300 ml-4 Flow Pts 239 ml-2 Flow Pt,
L4600 66o ml—io Flow Pts iSo ml-2 Flow Pt,
L6000 960 ml—I4 Flow Pts 120 ml-2 Flow Pts
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS S
Split piping and straight piping are both allowed
on L1600, L3000 and L4600 systems.
L6000 systems must use split piping only, with no
nozzle located before the split, and with a maximum of
14 flow points per side. 1/2 in. minimum piping must be
used up to the first split.
Maximum volume for 1/4 in. pipe between a
nozzle and the preceding tee is 410 mls.
Maximum flow numbers for 1/4 in. pipe is 6.
Maximum number of elbows between a nozzle and
the preceding tee is 5.
Maximum of 25 elbows are allowed in the total
piping system.
Maximum difference in elevation between the tank
outlet and any nozzle is 10 ft.
No traps are allowed in the piping network.
Pipe lengths are measured from center to center of
fittings.
The internal equivalent length volume of fittings
does not have to be considered as part of the total pipe
volume.
When utilizing different size pipe in the system, C
the largest size must start first and the additional pipe
must decrease as it approaches the nozzle.
Elbow(s) or swivel adaptors located at the nozzles
do not have to be counted in the 25 elbow maximum
requirement.
13 Reducing bushings are allowed when reducing to a
smaller pipe size.
14. Additional piping requirements when protecting a
range, wok, or a fryer:
L1600 - Minimum of 239 ml and one (1) flow
numbers required in total system. Of that
minimum, 180 ml and one (1) flow numbers must
be utilized at or before the range, wok, or fryer
L3000 - Minimum of 300 ml and four (4) flow
numbers required in total system. Of that
minimum, 239 ml and two (2) flow numbers must
be utilized at or before the range, wok, or fryer.
L4600 - Minimum of 660 ml and ten (10) flow
numbers required in total system. Of that
minimum, 180 ml and two (2) flow numbers must
be utilized at or before the range, wok, or fryer.
L6000 - Minimum of 960 ml and fourteen (14)
flow numbehs required in total system. Of that
minimum, 120 ml and 2 flow numbers must be S
utilized at or before the range, wok, or fryer.
Once the nozzle placement and quantity of tanks has been
determined, it is necessary to determine the piping configurations
between the tank and the nozzles. This section contains the
guidelines and limitations for designing the distribution piping so
that the wet chemical agent will discharge from the nozzles at a
proper flow rate. These limitations must also be referred to when
selecting the mounting location for the tanks.
The maximum pipe lengths are based on internal pipe volume.
Each size tank is allowed a minimum and maximum total volume
of piping, calculated in milliliters.
There is no need to distinguish between what portion of the
piping is supply line and what portion is branch line. Only the
total volume of the complete piping network has to be considered.
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 12, 2006 48 Part # 10053
12 -2"
10
(2) 18 IN. X 24 IN. FRYERS
(I) 30 N. X 36 IN. GRIDDLE
24 IN. DIAMETER WOK
Chapter 3 —System Design
S
SUPPLY PIPE
MUST ENTER BULL
-
SIDE OF TEE
SPLIT PIPING
STRAIGHT PIPING
Figure 3-32
DESIGN STEPS
Step No. 1 Determine number of flow points required based
on duct size, plenum size and type, and size of all
appliances.
Step No. 2 Determine size and cuantity of tanks required. Refer
to the chart in "Genejal Piping Requirements" to
determine the maximum amount of flow numbers
allowed per each tank size.
Step No. 3 Layout nozzles, piping diagram, and tank location.
Determine pipe lengths as accurate as possible. Make
certain maximum number of elbows is not exceeded.
Note: Tanks cannot re manifolded together. Each
tank must have a separate piping network.
Step No. 4 Add all the lengths of each pipe run and multiply by
the mls./ft. listed in :ie Volume Chart. If the sum falls
within the acceptable range noted in general Piping
Requirements, that ppe size is acceptable. If the
calculated volume is to large, recalculate the volume
using the ml per fooz of a smaller pipe size. Pipe sizes
can be mixed but Rule No. 11 of the General Piping
Requirements must be followed.
Step No. 5 Check to make certain minimum volumes, maximum
volumes and maximum volume allowed between first
nozzle and last nozz'e is not exceeded (Tank Chart).
Check each rule in "General Piping Requirement"
to make certain none have been exceeded. If any
requirement is exceeced, change to a different pipe
size and recalculate.
EXAMPLE
The cooking area that requires protection consists of a single 48
in. perimeter exhaust duct, a 10 ft. long "V" bank plenum, (2) 18
in. wide x 24 in. fryers, a 30 in. x 36 in. wide griddle, and a 24 in.
diameter wok. See Figwe 3-33.
Figure 3-33
Step No. 1: Determine number of flow points required.
4S in. perimeter duct requires one one-flow nozzle
10 ft. "V" bank hood requires one one-flow nozzle
18 in. x 24 in. fryer requires one two-flow nozzle
16 in. x 24 in. fryer requires one two-flow nozzle
30 in. x 36 in. griddle requires one one-flow nozzle
24 in. diameter wok requires one one flow-nozzle
TOTAL FLOW NUMBERS -8
Step No. 2 Determine size and quantity of tanks required.
Referring to the chart in "General Piping
Requirements," an L3000 and an L4600 can supply
13 flows, therefore, an L3000 can be used.
S
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 49 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
Step No. 3 Make an accurate sketch of the cooking lineup and
the hood. Sketch in the tank location and all the
piping required for the total system. Make certain all
pipe lengths and number of elbows are as accurate as
possible. Check the "General Piping Requirements"
to determine that the minimum and maximum
requirements are met. See Figure 3-34.
0 0
Figure 3-34
Step No. 4: Total all pipe lengths. Refer to the Volume CF art.
Chose a given pipe size and multiply the ml per foot
by the total length of all the pipe. If the sum falls
within the acceptable range noted in Tank Chart, that
pipe size is acceptable. If the calculated volume is too
large, recalculate the volume using the ml per foot of a
smaller pipe size. See Figure 3-35
Add section A-B = 0-6' + 5+ 14+ 2+ 0-6' = 22' Add
section B-C = 1'-6"
Add section C-D = 1'
Add section D-E = 2'
Add section E-F = 0-6"
Add section F-L = Y + 2' + 2 = 7'
Add section B-G = 0-6"
Add section C-H = 2' + 2' = 4'
Add section D-I = 2'+ 2'= 4'
Add section E-J = 0-6" + 0-6" = 1'
Add section F-K = 2'+ 2'= 4'
Total length of all pipe = 47-6
Refer to Volume Cha-t. The pipe size chosen is 3/8
inch. The volume per foot of 3/8 in. pipe is 37.5 ml.
Multiply 37.5 by the total pipe length of 47.5 ft. 37.5
ml x 47.5 ft. = 1781 ml total volume
The maximum volume allowed for an L3000 is 1910
ml, therefore, 3/8 in. pipe is acceptable for this system.
2 2
2
Figure 3-35
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 50 Part # 10053
S
Chapter 3 —System Design
Step No. 5 Check to make certain minimum volumes and does not have to be considered as part of the total
maximum volume allowed between first nozzle and pipe volume. (Example system OK)
last nozzle are not exceeded (Tank Chart). Check 11.When utilizing different size pipe in the total
each rule in 'General Piping Requirements" to make system, the largest size must start first and the
certain none have been exceeded. If any requirement additional pipe must decrease as it approaches the
is exceeded, change to a different pipe size and nozzle. (Example system N/A)
recalculate. See Figure 3-36. Elbow(s) or swivel adaptors located at the nozzles
Refer to Tank Chart, page 48. do not have to be counted in the 25 elbow
maximum requirement. (Example system OK)
Minimum Pipe Volume for L3000 is 300 milliliters Additional piping requirements when protecting a
protecting a fryer, wok, or range (Example system pipe range, wok, or a fryer:
volume is 1781 milliliters, therefore OK) L1600: Minimum of 239 ml and one (1)
flow numbers required in total system. Of
Maximum Pipe Volume for L3000 is 1910 milliliters that minimum, 180 ml and one (1) flow
(Example system pipe volume is 1781 milliliters, thenfrrc numbers must be utilized at or before the
OK) range, wok, or fryer
L3000: Minimum of 300 ml and four (4)
Maximum Volume Allowed Between First Nozzle and flow numbers required in total system. Of
Last Nozzle for L3000 is 1125 milliliters (Example that minimum, 239 ml and two (2) flow
system, the amount of3/8 in. piping between G and L, L numbers must be utilized at or before the
25.5 feet. 25.5feet x 37.5 mis/ft. = 956.3 ml, therefore. range, wok, or fryer. (Example system has
OK) 1781 ml and lOflow numbers, therefore, OK
The example system has 1050 ml and 3 flows
Refer to General Piping Requirements, page 48. before the fryer, therefore, OK)
1. Split piping and straight piping are both allowed L4600: Minimum of 660 ml and ten (10)
L3000 and L4600 systems. (Example system () flow numbers required in total system. Of
L6000 systems must use split piping only, with that minimum, 180 ml and two (2) flow
no nozzle located before the split, and with a numbers must be utilized at or before the
maximum of 14 flow points per side. /2 in. range, wok, or fryer.
minimum piping must be used up to the first split. L6000: Minimum of 960 ml and fourteen
(Example system N/A) (14) flow numbers required in total system.
Maximum volume for 1/4 in. pipe between a nDzz.e Of that minimum, 120 ml and 2 flow
and the preceding tee is 410 mls. (Example systens numbers must be utilized at or before the
N/A) range, wok, or fryer.
Maximum flow numbers for 1/4 in. pipe is 6.
(Example system N/A) GEN. PIPING
Maximum number of elbows between a nozzle RULE NO. 1, 8,9
and the preceding tee is 5. (Example system has a GEN. PIPING
AHK.C-IART RULE NO. 5
maximum number 0f2, therefore, OK) 'INIMUMJMAXIMUM
'.'OLUME TANK CHART
Maximum of 25 elbows are allowed in the total MAX. VOL.
GEN. BETWEEN
piping system. (Example system has 11 elbows, PIP! FIRSTAND
therefore, OK,) RULE . LAST NOZZLE
NO. 3 TANK CHART GEN. PIPING
Maximum difference in elevation between the tsn' MAX. RULE NO. 12
3E'. : BETWEEN FIRST
outlet and any nozzle, or the tank outlet and th IPIIC AND LAST NOZZ 0
0 RULE : highest or lowest horizontal pipe run, is 10 ft. 0 NC 0 GEN. PIPING 0 I 0 , (Example system has 5'-6' therefore, OK) AULENO.6
No traps are allowed in the piping network.
(Example system has no traps, therefore, OK) GEN. PIPING
RULE NO. 13
Pipe lengths are measured from center to center of
fittings. (Example system pipe lengths were mea:u
from center to center offittings, therefore, OK) Figure 3-36
The internal equivalent length volume of fittings
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 51 Part # 10053
Chapter 3 - System Design
DETECTOR PLACEMENT
Detectors are required over cooking appliances and in the duct(s)
of protected ventilation hoods. Detectors shall be located in the
plenum area of the ventilation hood.
EXHAUST DUCT(S).
Each exhaust duct must have at least one (1) detector installed in
the duct entrance, located in the air stream of the cooking vapors
at a maximum of 12 feet into the duct, centered. See Figure 3-37
COOKING APPLIANCE(S).
Each cooking appliance with a continuous cooking surface
not exceeding 48" x 48" shall be protected by one (1) detector.
Cooking appliances with a continuous cooking surface exceeding
48" x 48" shall be protected by one (1) detector per 48 x 48"
cooking area. Detectors used for cooking appliances must be
located within the perimeter of the protected appliance toward the
exhaust duct side of the appliance. The detector should be located
in the air stream of the appliance to enhance system response
time.
If a cooking appliance is located under a duct opening where
a detector has been mounted, it is not necessary to utilize an
additional detector provided the duct detector is not more than
12' into the duct opening. If two (2) appliances are located
under a duct opening where a detector has been mounted, it is is not necessary to utilize an additional detector provided the duct
detector is not more than 12" into the duct opening. See Figure
3-37.
APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE I COVERED COVERED COVERED COVERED
BY BY BY BY
DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR
A B B C
A __ ___ c
Figure 3-37: Proper Detector Placement S
PIPE VOLUMES CONVERSION CHART
1/4" = 20.5 ml per ft. 3/8" = 37.5 ml per ft. 1/2" = 59.8 ml per ft. 3/4" = 105 ml per ft.
Total Pipe From First Nozzle to Last Nozzle
Total First Maximum Pipe Length Maximum Pipe Length
Cylinder Flow Pipe Nozzle to
Size Points Volume Last Nozzle '4' L'/~" ~" 1/4" 3/s" ½" 3%"
L1600 5 1500 600 73.10 ft 40.00 ft 25.00 ft 29.20 ft 16.00 ft ,o.00 ft
L3000 10 [ 1910 1 1125 [ 93.17 ft 50.93 ft 3i.4 ft 18.19 ft [ 54.88 ft F 30.00 ft [ 18.81 ft 10.71 ft
L4600 14 3400 3000 16.8 ft 90.67 ft S6.86 ft 32.38 ft 146.34 ft 80.00 ft 50.17 ft 28.57 ft
L4600 15 2600 2000 126.83 ft 69.33 ft 43.48 ft 24.76 ft 97.56 ft [ 53.33 ft [ 33.44 ft J 19.05 ft
L6000 Ig 4215 1688/side 205.61 ft 112.40 ft 70.48 ft 40.14 ft 82.34 ft ft 28.23 ft 16.o8 ft
L6000 20 3465 [ ,3,2.5/side 16.02 ft j 92.40 ft 57.94 ft 33.00 ft f 64.02 ft 35-00 ft 21.95 ft [ 12.50
Pipe Pipe Size/ml
length/ft ¼" 3/8" ½" 3/4"
I 20.5 37.5 59.8 105
2 [ 41 75 119.6 [210
3 61. 112.5 179.4 315
82 [ ISO [239.2 1420
5
6
102.5
[123
187.5 299
1225 1358.8
525
1630
7
8
143.5
1 264
262.5 418.6
[300 1478.4
735
1840
9
10
184.5 337.5 538.2
[3 [598
945
1205 75 1050
Pipe Pipe Size/ml
1engt1/ft 1%" i/s" ½" [ 3/4"
II
12
225.5
246
1412.5
1450
657.8
[717.6
,iç
11260
13
14
266.5
287
487.5
1525
777.4
[837.2
1365
11470
15
16
307.5
[328
562.5
1600
897
1956.8
1575
[1680
17 348.5 637.5 ,oi6.6 1785
18 1369 1675 11076.4 [1890
19 389.5 712.5 1136.2 1995
20 410 j750 11196 2100
S
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 52 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
CHAPTER IV
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
GENERAL
This chapter will detail the basic information necessary for
proper installation of the Protex Series II Restaurant Fire
Suppression System. However, before attempting any installation
it is necessary to attend a Factory Certification Training Class
and become Certified to install the Protex Series II Restaurant
Fire Suppression System. Because it is difficult tc completely
understand every aspect of an intricate pre-engineered system
simply by reading the Technical Manual, Heiser Logistics will not
be responsible for system installations or maintenance performed
by any non-Certified person(s).
Pipe and fittings for the discharge piping, condut (EMT), pipe
straps, pipe hangers, mounting bolts, and other miscellaneous
equipment are not furnished as part of the Pro-ex Series II
Restaurant Fire Suppression System. These items must be
furnished by the installer.
Before attempting any installation, unpack the entire system
and check that all necessary parts are on hand. Inspect parts for
damage. Verify that cylinder pressure is within the acceptable
range as shown on the gauge.
CYLINDER INSTALLATION
The cylinder and valve assembly is shipped with an anti-recoil
plug in the valve discharge port.
/ CAUTION /
The anti-recoil plug must remain in the valve iischarge port
until the discharge piping is connected to the valve.
11
The cylinder must be mounted vertically. The L1600, L3000
and L4600 cylinders must be mounted using a MB15 Mounting
Bracket Kit. The L6000 cylinder must be mounted using a MB1
Mounting Bracket Kit.
The bracket must be securely anchored to the wall using bolts
or lag screws. The wall to which the bracket is attached must be
sufficiently strong to support the cylinder. The bracket should
never be fastened to dry wall or similar material. If this type
of wall is encountered, studs must be located and the bracket
fastened to them. See Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1. Cylinder and Mounting Bracket Installation.
CONTROL HEAD INSTALLATION
1. SINGLE CYLINDER INSTALLATIONS.
For single cylinder system installations the MCH2 Control
Head can be installed directly onto the cylinder valve. When the
control head is properly aligned in the desired position, tighten the
knurled locking ring to secure the assembly. See Figure 4-2.
Pj'oTexll
KNURLED LOCKING RING
S ANTI-RECOIL PLUG
Figure 4-2: Single Cylinder Installation Using MCH2 Control Head.
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 53 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
S 2. MULTIPLE CYLINDER INSTALLATIONS.
A. Multiple Cylinder Actuation Using MCH2 Control Head.
The MCH2 Control Head can be used to pneumatically actuate
a maximum of three (3) agent cylinders. When a control head is
used for multiple cylinder actuation, it cannot be mounted directly
onto a cylinder valve. The control head must be installed remotely
using an MBP2 Control Head Mounting Bracket. The bracket
must be anchored to the wall using bolts or lag screws.
In order to actuate the agent cylinder(s) from a control head,
a 1/4' NPT x 450 1/4" flare type fitting (conforming to SAE
J513c) must be screwed into the base of the control head actuator.
Pneumatic tubing is then used to connect the control head to the
valve cap assembly of each agent cylinder valve. See Figure 4-3.
NOTE
Pneumatic tubing used for remote cylinder actuation shall
have an outside diameter of 1/4' with a minimum wall
thickness of 1/32". This is commonly known as refrigeration-
type copper tubing. All tubing fittings shall be of the 1/4",
450 flare type conforming to SAE J513c.
Compression type fittings are not acceptable.
A single MCH2 Control Head can actuate three (3) agent
cylinders with a cumulative maximum of eight (8) feet of
pneumatic tubing.
B. Multiple Cylinder Actuation Using Model PAC100
Pneumatic Actuation Cylinder.
The PAC100 Pneumatic Actuation Cylinder must be used if more
than three (3) agent cylinders require simultaneous actuation.
The PAC100 must be used in conjunction with an MCH2
Control Head. The control head is mounted on the PAC100 valve
assembly.
The PAC100 is shipped complete with a mounting bracket. The
cylinder must be mounted vertically with the nameplate facing
out. The bracket must be securely anchored to the wall using bolts
or lag screws. The wall to which the bracket is attached must be
sufficiently strong to support the pneumatic cylinder. The bracket
should never be fastened to dry wall or similar material. If this
type of wall is encountered, studs must be located and the bracket
fastened to them. See Figure 4-4.
S
MC142 CONTROL HEAD
iiiJ I .--'
1/4" OD COPPER TUBING
96" MAX TOTAL FOR CYLINDER ACTUATION!
1/4NPT x 450 1/4'
FLARE TYPE
(SAEJ513C)
450 1/4" FLARED
TUBING NUT
L 1 S
Figure 4-3: Multiple Cylinder Actuation Using an MCH2 Control Head.
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 54 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
NOTE
Pneumatic tubing used for remote cylinder actuation shall
have an outside diameter of 1/4" with a minimum wall
thickness of 1/32". This is commonly known as refrigeration-
type copper tubing. All tubing fittings shall be of the 1/4",
450 flare type conforming to SAE J513c.
STRAP Compression type fittings are not acceptable.
The PAC100 pneumatic cylinder can actuate a maximum often
I RACKET (10) agent cylinders with a cumulative maximum of 100 feet of
pneumatic tubing.
[I
MCH2
CONTROL HEAD
PAC100 -
Figure 4-4. PAC100 Pneumatic Cylinder Installation.
In order to actuate the agent cylinders from a PAC1)0 Pneum.tic
Actuation Cylinder, a 3/4" NPT x 1/4" NPT bushing must be
screwed into the pneumatic cylinder's discharge port. A 1/4' NPT
x 450 1/4" flare type fitting (conforming to SAE J513c) must tien
be screwed into this bushing. Pneumatic tubing is then used to
connect the PAC100 pneumatic cylinder to the valve cap asserbly
of each agent cylinder valve. See Figure 4-5.
MCH2 CONTROL HEAD
- - cffexIIr 1/4" 3D COPPER
1/4NPTx451/4"
FLARE TYPE
th FITTING
(SAEJ5I3C)
[IJ
1/4 x 1/4 o 1/4 450 FLARE TEE
(TYPICAL)
TO REMAINING CYLINDERS
1/4NPT
3/4" NPT
BUSHING
PAC100
CYLINDER
45 FLARED
TUBING NUT
Figure 4-5: Multiple Cylinder Actuation Using an MCH2 Control Head.
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 55 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
FUSIBLE LINK DETECTOR
INSTALLATION
Fusible links are always used in conjunction with the MCH2
Mechanical Control Head. After mounting the cylinder and
control head, the fusible link line can be installed. The first
step to installing the fusible link line is to install the detector
bracket(s). These brackets must be installed in the plenum area
of the ventilation hood over all protected appliances and in each
duct. See Chapter III for detector placement guidelines.
Note: Only ML-style Fusible Links can be used.
Connect the fusible link brackets together using 1/2" conduit and
the conduit connectors supplied in the detector kit (P/N 210SH).
A Protex Series II corner pulley must be used whenever a change
in conduit direction is necessary. The conduit is connected to the
control head through a knockout in the upper left-side corner.
In general, fusible links centered in the detector brackets are
connected in series using 1/16" diameter stainless steel cable. The
spring plate in the control head maintains tension on this series of
fusible links. If the tension is released for any reason (i.e., a fusible
link separates), the control head will operate and actuate the
system. Maximum limitations for the fusible link detection line
are as follows
Fusible Link Line Limitations When Used with the MCH2 S
Control Head and 90KBS and 90SB Pulleys
Maximum # of detectors: 20
Maximum length of cable: 150 feet
Maximum # of pulleys: 40
Fusible links can be installed with or without fusible link hangers
(see Chapter II for description).
1. FUSIBLE LINK INSTALLATION WITHOUT
HANGERS.
Begin installing links at the terminal bracket. The link is
connected to the far side of the terminal bracket using an "5"
hook. The "S' hook must be crimped closed after the link is
installed. A tight loop is then made in the cable and secured
by the crimp provided. This loop is connected to the other side
of the terminal link (see Figure 4-6) and the cable fed through
the conduit to the next bracket. The cable proceeding from the
terminal link will be used to connect the series links (see Figure
4-7). Series links must be centered in their detector brackets.
After the last link in the series is connected, the cable should be
fed through the conduit back to the control head. Thread the 5 cable through the hole in the fusible link ratchet wheel. The line
must then be crimped, and the crimp positioned inside the center
of the ratchet wheel.
LINK DETECTOR BRACKET (P/N 349)
S-HOOK (P/N 341S)
Figure 4-6: Terminal Link Installation
1/2" EMT CONNECTOR (P/N 800)
1/16" STAINLESS STEEL CABLE
FUSIBLE LIN
CABLE CRIMP (P/N 310S)
Figure 4-7: Series Link Installation
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 56 Part # 10053
S
Chapter 4— Installation
NOTE
Crimps must always be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
lengths. Loops are the accepted method of connecting the
cable to mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used on a single cable.
The fusible link line can now be put into a set position by applying
tension to the fusible link line. This is accomplished by using a
½" hex wrench on the fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratthet
wheel will be ratcheted in a clockwise direction until the spring
plate makes contact with the top of the control head box. The
fusible link line is now in a set position. See Figure 4-8.
FUSIBLE
LINK Lfl
FUSIBLE
LINK
RATCHE
WHEEL
Figure 4-8: Fusible Link Line Termination.
S 2. FUSIBLE LINK INSTALLATION USING FLH25
FUSIBLE LINK HANGERS.
Beginning at the control head, feed the stainless steel cable
through the conduit and brackets to the terminal bracket in oie
continuous length. Allow approximately two and cne-half (2.5)
inches of slack at each bracket for the installation of the Fusible
Link Hangers. At the terminal link, a tight loop is made in the
cable and secured by the crimp provided. The cable is attached
to the far side of the terminal bracket using an hook. The
"S" hook must be crimped closed after the cable is installed. See
Figure 4-9.
CRIMP
APPROX. 2½" SLACK
"5" HOOK
Figure 4-10: Fusible Link Connection.
honk the bu:tom of the link onto the bottom leg of the hanger.
See Figure 4-Lt
Figure 4-:1: Fusible Link/Hanger Connection.
Center the iager/ink in the fusible link bracket by sliding it
along the fink line. This is easily accomplished before any tension
s apiiec to the link, line. Repeat this procedure for all fusible
links.
After the last aanger/link in the series is connected, the cable
should be fd :hrouh the ho:e in the fusible link ratchet wheel.
The line must then, be crimped, and the crimp positioned inside
the :erte: of t:ie :atchet wheel.
NOTE
Crim?s must aways be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
letigths. L'oaps are the accepted method of connecting the
cable o mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used oa a single cable.
Figure 4.9: Terminal Bracket Connection.
S
Begin installing the Fusible Link Hangers at the terminal bracket
and work toward the control head. Loop the cable through the
oval opening in the hanger and hook the fusible link on the lcoi
See Figure 4-10.
Note: Only ML-style Fusible Links can be used.
The fusib.,e ink line can now be put into a set position by applying
tenon t:i tir'e fusible link line. This is accomplished by using a
/2' iexwrench on tnie fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratchet
wheel will be ratcheed in a clockwise direction until the spring
plate makes contact with the top of the control head box. The
fusible li± line is now in a set position. See Figure 4-8.
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
Page rev. C
57 Part # 10053
Figure 4-12: Fusible Link/Hanger In Set Position.
Chapter 4 - Installation
Check to ensure that the fusible link hanger(s) remain centered in
the bracket after the fusible link line is set. See Figure 4-12.
NOTE
If wire rope requires splicing, a splice is to be a minimum
of 12 in. from any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid
interference.
SETTING THE CONTROL HEAD
1. MCH2 MECHANICAL CONTROL HEAD.
Once the fusible link line is set, the control head can be placed in
the set position. To set the control head, the slide plate is moved
from right to left, ensuring the bolt extending from the cam arm
is in the slot provided in the slide plate. Continue moving the slide
plate to the left until the latching arm is in the locked position.
Insert the pull pin into the hole in the slide plate above the
latching arm. This will lock the control head in the set position,
eliminating accidental actuation during the rest of the installation
procedure. See Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13: Control Head In Set Position.
2. RESET RELAY
A UL Listed reset relay is required whenever an electrical gas
shut-off valve is used in conjunction with the Protex Series II
Restaurant Fire Suppression System.
REMOTE PULL STATION
INSTALLATION
S
CAM ARM
The RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station is used for remote S
mechanical actuation of all system releasing devices. It is to be
located near an exit in the path of egress from the hazard area no
more than 48 inches and no less than 42 inches above the floor.
S
FUSIBLE LINK -..
BRACKET
(SOLD SEPARATE]
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 58 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
NOTE
An RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station must be used for
manual activation of an MCH2 releasing device.
The Pull Station can be surface mounted or flush mounted. For
flush mounting a RACO #232 4" deep electrical box or equivalent
must be used (dealer supplied). It is connected to the releasing
device using 1/16" diameter stainless steel cable. The cable enters
the pull station box through the center hole in the bottom, top,
either side, or the center back hole. The cable enters the control
head through the t op-center knockout. The cable must be
enclosed in 1/2' conduit with a Protex Series II corner pulley at
each change in conduit direction. Maximum limitations for the
RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station are as follows:
RPSM Cable Run Limitations When Used with an MCH2
Control Head and 90KBS and 90SB Pulleys
Maximum length of cable: 150 feet
Maximum # of pulleys (1/16"): 40
After mounting the pull station box and conduit, feed the stainless
•
steel cable from the releasing device, through the conduit, and into
the pull station box. Feed the cable through the bushing. Insert
the cable into the pull handle and secure it by tightening the screw
with a 3/32" allen wrench (see Figure 4-14).
NOTE
Crimps must always be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
lengths. Loops are the accepted method of connecting the
cable to mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used on a single cable.
Pull the pull handle until the crimp touches the latching arm. See
Figure 4-15. Coil the excess cable in the pull box and attach the
cover plate with the four screws provided. Insert the pull handle
into the cover plate and insert the pull pin
PULL STATION PULL STATION
Figure 4-15: RPSM Remote Pull Station Connection
rn,r r ern-r1n1 RING PIN
Figure 4-14: RPSM Remote Pull Station Installation.
Cut and thread the cable through the hole in the latching arm
of the control head and pull the cable tight. Crimp the cable
approximately ten to twelve inches below the latching arm. Note:
S NFPA-17A requires the pull length to be no more
than 14 in.
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 59 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
GAS SHUT OFF VALVE INSTALLATION S
1. MECHANICAL GAS SHUT-OFF VALVE / CAUTION /
INSTALLATION.
The MCH2 Control Head is used to operate the mechanical gas
shut-off valve. This valve is located in the fuel gas supply line
to the cooking appliance(s). The valve body has an arrow which
indicates direction of gas flow through the valve. The gas shut-off
valve is spring loaded and requires five pounds of force to hold
it open. This force is supplied by a 1/16' diameter stainless steel
cable that is connected to the control head.
After the valve is installed in the gas line, 1/2" conduit must be
run from the top center knockout of the gas valve box to the lower
right-hand knockout in the control head. A Protex Series II corner
pulley is used wherever a change in conduit direction is required.
Gas Valve Cable Run Limitations When Used with an
MCH2 Control Head and 90KBS and 90SB Pulleys
Maximum length of cable (1/16"): 100 feet
Maximum # of pulleys: 30
Remove the gas valve cover and thread the stainless steel cable
through the conduit back to the control head. Thread the cable
through the hole in the gas valve ratchet wheel. The line must
then be crimped, and the crimp positioned inside the center of the
ratchet wheel.
NOTE
Crimps must always be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
lengths. Loops are the accepted method of connecting the
cable to mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used on a single cable.
At the gas valve, loop the cable through the valve stem and secure
it with the crimp provided (see Figure 4-16).
½" EMT
Figure 4-16: Gas Valve Installation.
CONNECTOR
Do not overtighten gas valve. Overtightening the gas valve
may cause the valve to not close completely, thus not fully
shutting the fuel supply off to the appliance.
The gas valve line can now be put into a set position by applying
tension to the gas valve line. This is accomplished by using a ½"
hex wrench on the gas valve ratchet wheel. The ratchet wheel will
be ratcheted in a clockwise direction until the gas valve is fully
open. See the Instruction Sheet included in gas valve shipping
assembly, for detailed information. Secure the gas valve cover plate
to the gas valve box with the four (4) screws provided. The gas
valve line is now in a set position. See Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17: Gas Valve Line Termination.
2. ELECTRICAL GAS SHUT-OFF VALVE
INSTALLATION.
The MCH2 Control Head is used to operate the electrical gas
shut-off valve. This valve is located in the fuel gas supply line
to the cooking appliance(s). The valve body has an arrow which
indicates direction of gas flow through the valve. A reset relay
must always be used with an electrical gas shut-off valve.
GAS VALVE
CABLE
RELEASE
CONNECTION
S
CONTROL VALVE BODY
BOX
UNION '----d I UNION
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 Page rev. C 60 Part# 10053
S
Figure 4-20. Electrical Switch Installation in
MCH2 Control Head.
NOTE
No electrical connections shall be made inside the control
head. All electrical wiring shall exit the control head through
the knockout on the side of the box. All electrical connections
must be made in an approved electrical box.
These switches may be used to provide an electrical signal to the
main breaker and/or operate electrical accessories such as electrical
contactors for power shut-down of electrical appliances, provided
the rating of the switch is not exceeded. Wiring connections are
shown in Figure 4-21. The contact ratings for the switch is as
follows:
Contact Ratings For Electrical Switches
21 amps 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or
2 HP, 250, 277 VAC
BLACK
RED
BROWN
Figure 4-21. Wiring Diagram for
MSSPDT2 Electrical Switch.
Chapter 4 - Installation
S TEE PULLEY INSTALLATION
The 1513 Tee Pulley is used to connect two (2) mechanical gas
valves or two (2) remote mechanical pull stations to a single
control head. The cable proceeding from the control head must
always enter the branch of the tee puley. See Figure 4-18.
A tee pulley that is used to close two (2) gas valve can only be
used to close gas valves with similar stem travel. Gas valves frDm
3/4" up to 1-1/2" can be used on the same tee pulley. A 2" gas.
valve can be used only with another 2 gas valve. Gas valves from
2-1/2" up to 3" can be used on the same tee pulley. As an example,
using a 3/4" gas valve with a 3" gas valve will not allow the 3'
valve to fully open.
Ls CAUTION
The tee pulley must never be used to connect trultiple fusible
link lines to a single control head.
Figure 4-18: Tee Pulley Installation.
ELECTRICAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
The MSSPDT2, MSDPDT2, MS3_3DT2, or MS4PDT2
Electrical Switch is available for use where transferable switch
contacts are required upon activatior of the extinguishing system.
See Figure 4-19. These switches can be field installed in the
control head. See Figure 4-20 and refer to the Instruction Sheet
included with switch shipping assembly, for detailed mounting
instructions.
S
Figure 4-19: Electrical Swich(P/N MSSPDT2)
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 Page rev. C 61 Part# 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
PIPE AND NOZZLE INSTALLATION
All pipe ends shall be thoroughly reamed after cutting and all oil
and foreign matter removed from the pipe. It is recommended that
the following procedures be followed:
Use Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel
pipe and fittings. Do not use hot-dipped galvanized iron pipe or
fittings in the agent distribution piping.
Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends
are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside
of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt.
The distribution piping and fitting connections, located in
the hood or the protected area, must be sealed with pipe tape.
When applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread and
wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the
threads, away from the pipe opening.
ds CAUTION
Do not apply PTFE tape to cover or overlap the pipe opening,
as the pipe and nozzles could become blocked and prevent the
proper flow of agent.
Do not use thread sealant or pipe joint compound.
Do not over-tighten, but be sure the pipe is snug. Do not back-
off sections of pipe to make them fit better. If the pipe was cut
too short, re-cut another pipe to the proper length.
All piping shall be securely fastened by means of pipe hangers
and/or pipe straps. A union should be installed in the discharge
piping, as close to the cylinder valve as possible, to permit
disconnection and removal for inspection and service. Dry air or
nitrogen should be blown through the discharge piping to remove
chips and other debris prior to installation of nozzles.
Nozzles shall be installed in accordance with the limitations
described in Chapter III of this manual. Blow-off caps are
provided for each nozzle. These will prevent dirt and grease from
clogging the nozzle.
SYSTEM CHECKOUT AFTER
INSTALLATION
1. MCH2 MECHANICAL CONTROL HEAD.
Before putting the system into service, all components must be
checked for proper operation. During this checkout, assure that
the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge is not installed in the control
head actuator. Remove the pull pin from the hole in the slide
plate.
To check satisfactory operation of the control head, reassemble
the cover plate to the control head, then cut the terminal link or
the "S" hook holding the link. This will relieve all tension on the
fusible link line and operate the control head. The slide plate will
have moved fully to the right. The gas valve cable will have been
released, causing the gas valve to close. Any auxiliary equipment
connected to the dry contacts of the solenoid monitor and/or the
Micro Switch in the control head will have operated.
NOTE
Make sure the white indicator tab is not binding on the cover
assembly. Binding could cause the system to be inoperative.
To correct this, turn the indicator mounting bolt until you
have 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) clearance between the front edge of
the control head back box and white indicator surface. Please
note that f the MCH2 is a newer model, it has been redeisgned to
eliminate the white indicator tab and the binding problem.
If any of these events fail to occur, the problem must be
investigated and repaired.
Repair the terminal link and put the fusible link line back into the
set position. This is accomplished by using a ½" hex wrench on the
fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratchet wheel will be ratcheted
in a clockwise direction until the spring plate makes contact with
the top of the control head box.
Once the fusible link line is set (note: Refer to page 56 through
56 for fusible link installation details), the control head can be
placed in the set position. To set the control head, the slide plate
is moved from right to left, ensuring the bolt extending from
the cam arm is in the slot provided in the slide plate. Continue
moving the slide plate to the left until the latching arm is in the
locked position.
/I CAUTION
Before screwing the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge into
the actuator, ensure that the actuator has a PTFE 0-ring
installed.
Once the control head is set, pull the pull handle on the remote
pull station to assure that the control head operates. If the control
head operates normally, the control head can be reset as described
above. Insert the pull pin into the hole in the slide plate above the
latching arm. Replace the pull station handle, pull pin, and nylon
tie.
Assure that the gas valve is fully open by ratcheting the gas
valve ratchet wheel Using a felt-tipped marker, write the date of
installation in the gray area of the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge.
Screw the cartridge into the control head actuator until hand-
tight. Never use a wrench to tighten the cartridge into the
actuator. Remove the pull pin from the hole in the slide plate and
install the control head cover. Insert the pull pin through the local
manual control handle and into the bushing. Secure the pull pin
with the nylon tie provided.
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
Page rev. C
62 Part# 10053
FUSIBLE LINK TO REMOTE FUSIBLE LINK
PULLEY PULL STATION RATCHET WHEEL
Figure 4-23: ENMCU2 Fusible Link Line
and Remote Pull Station Termination.
Chapter 4 - Installation
S ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
(P/N ENMCU2) AND (P/N ENS)
MOUNTING
The ENMCU2 and/or ENS Enclosures must be securely
Connect the fusible link brackets together using 1/2" EMT
conduit and the conduit connectors supplied in the detector
kit (P/N 210SH). Protex Series II corner pulleys must be used
whenever a change in conduit direction is necessary. The conduit
is connected to the enclosure through a top knockout.
anchored to the wall using bolts or lag screws. The wall to See Fusible Link Detector Installation Section of this chapter
which the enclosure is attached must be sufficiently strong. The (starting on 56) for fusible link installation guidelines. Before
enclosure should never be fastened. to dry wall or similar material, attaching the stainless steel cable to the fusible link line ratchet
If this type of wall is encountered, studs must be located and the wheel, it must be run below the fusible link line pulley in the
enclosure fastened to them, enclosure. See Figure 4-23.
Three (3) center mounting holes allow either enclosure to be
mounted on a single stud. Four (4) corner mounting holes are also
available. See Figure 4-22.
FUSIBLE LINK DETECTOR
INSTALLATION
The ENMCU2 Enclosure can support a fusible link detection
system. The ENS Enclosure cannot support a fusibie link
detection system and must be used in conjunction with the
ENMCU2 Enclosure or an MCH2 Control Head.
After mounting the enclosure, the fusible link line can be
is
installed. The first step to installing the fusible link line is to
install the detector brackets. These brackets must be installed
in the plenum area of the ventilation hood over all protected
appliances and in each duct. See C.haptr III for detector
placement guidelines.
TO REMOTE
MANUAL FULL STATION
TO FUSIBLE
TO ADDITIONAL
CYLINDERS
TO GAS VALVE
SHUTOFF
TO
ADDITIONAL
CYLINDERS
'OPTIONAL
ELECTRICAL
SWITCE
CONNECTION
MASTER ENCLOSURE SLAVE ENCLOSURE
ENMCU2 ENS
E
Fig--ire 4-22: ENMCU2 and ENS Enclosures.
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 63 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
SETTING THE ENMCU2
After the last link in the series is connected, the cable should be
fed through the conduit back to the ENMCU2. It must be fed
under the fusible link line pulley and through the hole in the
fusible link ratchet wheel. The line must then be crimped, and the
crimp positioned inside the ratchet wheel.
NOTE
Crimps must always be used in conjunction with two (2) cable
lengths. Loops are the accepted method of connecting the
cable to mechanical components. The crimp must never be
used on a single cable.
The fusible link line can now be put into a set position by
tensioning the fusible link line. This is accomplished by using a
1/2 hex wrench on the fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratchet
wheel will be ratcheted in a clockwise direction until the spring
plate is parallel to the top of the enclosure. The fusible link line is
now in a set position.
Once the fusible link line is set, the ENMCU2 Enclosure can be
placed in the set position. To set the ENMCU2, the slide plate
is moved from right to left, ensuring the bolt extending from
the cam arm is in the slot provided in the slide plate. Continue
moving the slide plate to the left until the latching arm is in the
locked position. Insert the pull pin into the hole in the slide plate
above the latching arm. This will lock the control mechanism in
the set position, eliminating accidental actuation during the rest of
the installation procedure. See Figure 4-23.
REMOTE PULL STATION
INSTALLATION
The RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station is used for remote
manual actuation of the ENMCU2 It is to be located near an exit
in the path of egress from the hazard area no more than 48 inches
nor less than 42 inches above the floor.
The Pull Station is connected to the ENMCU2 using 1/16
diameter stainless steel cable. The cable enters the ENMCU2
Enclosure through a knockout in the top of the enclosure. See
Figure 4-23.
See Remote Pull Station Installation Section of this chapter for
remote pull station installation guidelines.
GAS SHUT OFF VALVE INSTALLATION
The ENMCU2 Enclosure can be used to operate a mechanical
gas shut-off valve. This valve is located in the fuel gas supply line
to the cooking appliance(s). The valve body has an arrow which
indicates direction of gas flow through the valve. The gas shut-off
valve is spring loaded and requires five pounds of force to hold
it open. This force is supplies by a 1/16" diameter stainless steel
cable that is connected to the ENMCU2.
See "Gas Shut-Off Valve Installation" section of this chapter for
gas valve shut-off installation guidelines.
After the valve is installed in the gas line, 1/2" conduit must be
run from the top center knockout of the gas valve box to the top
or bottom knockout in the enclosure. See Figure 4-25. A Protex
Series II corner pulley is used wherever a change in conduit
direction is required.
Remove the gas valve cover and thread the stainless steel cable
through the conduit back to the ENMCU2. If the cable enters the
enclosure through the bottom knockout, the cable must be run
over the gas valve line pulley (see Figure 4-24). If the cable enters
the enclosure through the top knockout, the cable must be run
under the gas valve line pulley (see Figure 4-25). Thread the cable
through the hole in the gas valve ratchet wheel. The line must
then be crimped, and the crimp positioned inside the center of the
ratchet wheel.
[! CAUTION
The gas valve cable must always utilize the gas valve pulley
and exit the top or bottom of the enclosure. The gas valve
cable cannot exit the side of the enclosure.
At the gas valve, loop the cable through the valve stem and secure
it with the crimp provided (see Figure 4-16)
The gas valve line can now be put into a set position by applying
tension to the gas valve line. This is accomplished by using a ½"
hex wrench on the gas valve ratchet wheel. The ratchet wheel will
be ratcheted in a clockwise direction until the gas valve is fully
open. Secure the gas valve cover plate to the gas valve box with
the four (4) screws provided. The gas valve line is now in a set
position. See Figure 4-23 and Figure 4-24.
L CAUTION
Do not overtighten gas valve. Overtightening the gas valve
may cause the valve to not close completely, thus not fully
shutting the fuel supply off to the appliance.
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 64 Part # 10053
GAS VALVE
LINE PULLEY
Figure 4-24: Gas Valve / Electrical Switch Installation.
GAS VALVE
LINE PULLEY
Figure 4-25: Gas Valve / Electrical Switch Installation.
Chapter 4 - Installation
S ELECTRICAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
The MSSPDT2, MSDPDT2, MS3PDT2, or MS4PDT-EN
Electrical Switch is available for use where an electrical output is
required. These switches can be field installed in the ENMCU2
Master Enclosure. See Figure 4-24 and/or Figure 4-25.
These switches may be used to provide an electrical signal to
the main breaker and/or operate electrical accessories provid-ed
the rating of the switch is not exceeded. Wiring connections for
the MSSPDT2 are shown in Figure 4-21 (page 61). The contact
ratings for both switches are as follows:
Contact Ratings For Electrical Switches
21 amps 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or
2 HP, 250,277 VAC
Three (3) knockouts are provided for Electrical Switch wiring.
The upper right-side knockout must be used when the gas valve
line exits the bottom of the enclosure (see Figure 4-24). The lower
right-side knockout must be used when the gas valve line exits the
top of the enclosure (see Figure 4-25). An additional knockout
located on the top of the enclosure is also provided (see Figure
4-25) and may be used in either situation.
S
NOTE
No electrical connections shall be made inside the control
head. All electrical wiring shall exit the control head through
the knockout on the side of the box. All electrical connections
must be made in an approved electrical box.
S
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
Page rev. C
65 Part# 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
CYLINDER INSTALLATION
1. SINGLE CYLINDER INSTALLATION -
NOTE S
L1600/ 3000/4600.
The ENMCU2 Master Enclosure can be used for single cylinder
installations. It can support either the L1600, L3000 or L4600
cylinder assemblies. The cylinder must be placed in the enclosure
with the discharge port to the left. No additional mounting
bracket is required when the ENMCU2 is used.
In order to actuate the agent cylinder from the ENMCU2's
control mechanism, pneumatic tubing must be used to connect
the actuator to the valve cap assembly of the agent cylinder valve.
A 1/4" NPT x 1/4", 45° flare type elbow is included and must be
installed in the actuator of the ENMCU2 Enclosure. See Figure
4-26.
Figure 4-26: Single Cylinder Installation with an ENMCU2
Mechanical Control Unit.
Pneumatic tubing used for remote cylinder actuation shall
have an outside diameter of 1/4" with a minimum wall
thickness of 1/32". This is commonly known as refrigeration-
type copper tubing. All tubing fittings shall be of the 1/4",
45° flare type conforming to SAE J513c.
Compression type fittings are not acceptable.
2. MULTIPLE CYLINDER INSTALLATION - L1600,
L3000/4600.
The ENS Slave Enclosure can be used in conjunction with
the ENMCU2 Master Enclosure or MCH2 Control Head for
multiple cylinder installations. A single ENMCU2 can be used
to pneumatically actuate a maximum of three (3) agent cylinders.
One (1) agent cylinder can be installed in the ENMCU2
Enclosure; the additional agent cylinder(s) can either be mounted
in an ENS Enclosure or with an MB15 Mounting Bracket.
When an enclosure is used, the cylinders must be placed in the
enclosure(s) with the discharge port to the left. No additional
mounting bracket is required when a cylinder is installed in the
ENMCU2 or ENS Enclosure.
In order to actuate the agent cylinders from the ENMCU2,
pneumatic tubing must be used to connect the ENMCU2 actuator
to the valve cap assembly of each agent cylinder valve. Pneumatic
tubing must be run from the actuator in the ENMCU2 to the
ENS(s) through the side knockout. A 1/4", 45° flare x 1/4", 45°
flare x 1/4" NPT tee is included with the ENS enclosure and
must be installed in the ENMCU2 actuator. See Figure 4-27.
A single ENMCU2 can actuate a maximum of three (3) cylinders
with a cumulative total of up to 8' of copper tubing.
Tee/ L,7~ S
Figure 4-27: Multiple Cylinder Installation with an ENMCU2 Master Enclosure and ENS Slave Enclosures
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 66 Part # 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
S SYSTEM CHECKOUT AFTER
INSTALLATION
Before putting the system into service, all components must
be checked for proper operation. During this checkout, assure
that the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge is nct installed in the
ENMCU2 actuator. Remove the pull pin from the hole in the
slide plate.
To check satisfactory operation of the control mechanism, cut the
terminal link or the "S" hook holding the link. This will relieve all
tension on the fusible link line and operate the control mechanism.
The slide plate will have moved fully to the right. The gas valve
cable will have been released, causing the gas valve to close. Any
auxiliary equipment connected to the dry contacts of the solenoid
monitor and/or the Electrical Switch in the ENMCU2 Enclosure
will have operated.
If any of these events fail to occur, the problem must be
investigated and repaired.
Repair the terminal link and put the fusible link line back into the
set position. This is accomplished by using a ½" hex wrench on the
fusible link line ratchet wheel. The ratchet wheel will be ratcheted
in a clockwise direction until the spring plate is parallel to the top
of the enclosure.
dCAUTION
Before screwing the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge into
the actuator, ensure that the actuator has a PTFE O-ring
installed.
Once the fusible link line is set, the control mechanism can be
placed in the set position. To set the control mechanism, the slide
plate is moved from right to left, ensuring the bolt extending from
the cam arm is in the slot provided in the slide plate. Continue
moving the slide plate to the left until the latching arm is in the
locked position. Once the control mechanism is set, pull the pull
handle on the remote pull station to assure that the control head
operates. If the control mechanism operates normally, the control
mechanism can be reset as described above. Insert the pull pin
into the hole in the slide plate above the latching arm. Replace the
pull station handle, pull pin, and nylon tie.
Assure that the gas valve is fully open by ratcheting the gas valve
ratchet wheel. Do not overtighten.
Verify that the wet chemical cylinder pressure gauge indicator
shows the correct operating pressure. If the system has a PAC100
installed, verify that the pressure indicator shows the correct
operating pressure.
Using a felt-tipped marker, write the date of installation on
the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge. Screw the cartridge into the
ENMCU2 actuator until hand-tight. Never use a wrench to
tighten the cartridge into the actuator.
Remove the pull pin from the hole in the slide plate. Secure the
ENMCU2 or ENS cover with the screws provided.
I
Page rev. C
Part# 10053
Chapter 4 - Installation
NOTES: S
S
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 68 Part # 10053
Chapter 5 - Maintenance
S CHAPTER V
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
GENERAL
This chapter will detail the basic information necessary for proper
maintenance of the Protex Series II Restaurant Fire Suppression
System. However, before attempting any system maintenance,
it is necessary to attend a Factory Certification Training Class
and become certified to install and maintain the Protex Series
II Restaurant Fire Suppression System. Because it is difficult to
completely understand every aspect of an intricate pre-engineered
system simply by reading the Technical Manual, Heiser Logistics
will not be responsible for system maintenance performed by any
non-certified person(s).
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
Check that the hazard area has not changed.
Check that the system has not been tampered with, ie., nozzles
removed, nozzles not aimed properly, piping not supported
properly, blow off caps in place.
Check the entire system for mechanical damage.
Check all nozzle orifices to make certain they are not plugged.
Replace blow off caps or O-ring if necessary.
S CAUTION
Before continuing, remove the cover from the control head
and insert the safety pin in the hole in the slide plate above
the latching arm. This will secure the system, preventing
accidental discharge.
12. Verify that the wet chemical cylinder (and, if part of the
system, the PAC100) are pressurized as intended.
ANNUAL MAINTENANCE
Inspect as per semi-annual maintenance instructions. Do not
reconnect control head at this time.
Disconnect the discharge piping from the valve outlet. Using
air or nitrogen, blow out the piping. Replace all nozzle caps.
Replace the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge.
Replace the control head cover and tamper seal.
Reconnect the control head.
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE
Along with the required annual maintenance requirements,
the cylinders (and, if part of the system, the PAC100) must be
removed from the system, properly discharged, and hydrostatically
tested to the factory marked pressure, per the requirements of
NFPA-17A 7-5. The tank should be refilled with fresh agent, per
the recharge section of this manual.
Disconnect the control head from the tank, or disconnect the
pneumatic tubing from the control head
Remove the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge in the control head.
Inspect the pulley elbows for excessive grease buildup. Clean
elbows if necessary. Replace fusible links.
Remove the safety pin from the slide plate. Actuate the control
head by cutting the "5" hook at the terminal detector to ensure
it is functioning properly. Make certain the gas shut-off valve
operates correctly. Reset the link detection line and gas valve,
then activate the remote pull station and ensure that the control
head and gas valve operate correctly.
Reinstall the carbon dioxide pilot cartridge, and replace the
control head cover. Replace the tamper seal on the remote
manual pull.
10.Reconnect the control head or pneumatic tubing.,
11.Check the agent cylinder (and, if part of the system, the . PAC100) for corrosion, excessive pitting, structural damage,
fire damage, or repairs by soldering, welding, or brazing. If
any such damage or repairs are found, hydrostatically test the
equipment to the factory marked pressure, per NFPA-17A 5-5
Page rev. C UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 69 Part # 10053
Chapter 5 - Maintenance
NOTES: S
S
S
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 70 Part # 10053
Chapter 6 - Recharge
CHAPTER VI
SYSTEM RECHARGE
GENERAL
This chapter will detail the basic informatIoa necessary for proper
recharge of the Protex Series II Restaurant Fire. Suppression
System. However, before attempting any systen recharge, it is
necessary to attend a Factory Certification Training Class and
become certified to install, maintain, and recharge the Protex
Series II Restaurant Fire Suppression System. Because it is
difficult to completely understand every aspect of an intricate
pre-engineered system simply by reading the Technical Manual,
Heiser Logistics will not be responsible for system recharge
performed by any non-certified person(s).
SYSTEM CLEANUP
CAUTION
Before attempting any cleanup, make certain :hat all fuel
sources to the equipment to be cleaned have been shut
off. Make certain that the exhaust hood and all appliance
electrical controls have been de-energized to avoid any chance
of electrical shock resulting from the cleani :g process of
electrically conductive alkaline liquid agent and/or its residue.
S Make certain all surfaces to be cleaned have cooled down to
room temperature.
Do not use water to clean any appliances th3t contain
hot grease or cooking oils. Doing so may result in violent
steaming and/or spattering.
SYSTEM RECHARGE
NOTE
Determine the cause of system discharge and correct
immediately before performing system rech Irge.
After discharge, inspect the entire system f:r mechanical
damage. If the tank has sustained any mecLanical damage, it
must be hydrostatically tested before refiliing.
Disconnect the 1/4 in. actuation tubing or :h control head
from the top of the tank valve.
Relieve the pressure from the top chamber of :he tank valve by
depressing the core of the valve in the valve cap assembly. By
5 performing this operation, the valve will close.
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
Slowly remove the valve and siphon tube. If there is any residual
pressure left in the tank, it will bleed out through the pressure
relief slot in the valve threads.
The complete piping system must be flushed after a discharge.
Flushing solution, Part No. 79656, must be used when flushing
the system. The solution is shipped in a 32 oz. container. An
L1600 tank requires 1/2 container of solution. An L3000 tank
requires 1 container of solution. An L4600 requires 1-1/2
containers, and an L6000 requires 2 containers. To prepare the
system for flushing:
Pour the required amount of flushing solution into the tank.
Fill the tank approximately half full with warm, clear water.
Agitate the tank for a few seconds and then add more warm
water to bring the level to the required fill line using the
measuring stick, Part No. 551039.
Reinstall valve and pickup tube and pressurize tank to 225
psi and reinstall to piping network.
6. With nozzles in place, attach control head and manually actuate
the tank. Allow the tank to completely discharge through the
piping network.
After the discharge is completed, the entire piping network
must be blown out with air or nitrogen until no more mist is
visual coming out of the nozzles.
8. Remove, clean, and reinstall all nozzles.
Remove the tank from the system. Slowly remove the valve and
siphon. If there is any residual pressure left in the tank, it will
bleed out through the pressure relief slot in the valve threads.
The valve and pressure regulator (located in outlet of valve)
must be cleaned and rebuil: after each discharge. To rebuild the
valve, use rebuilding kit, Part No. 490420698. To rebuild the
pressure regulator, use rebuilding kit, Part No. 551061. Each
kit includes an instruction sheet listing detailed rebuilding
instructions.
10. Fill tank with required amount of Protex agent, Part No.
RL1600 or RL3000.
NOTE
During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 T to 80
°F (16 C to 27 CC).
Page rev. C 71 Part# 10053
Chapter 6 - Recharge
11. Reinstall valve and pickup tube and pressurize tank to 225 psi
(using recharge adaptor, Part No. 551240).
NOTE
The regulator must be removed from the valve body before
a recharge can be attempted. The recharge adaptor (P/N
551240) is threaded into the discharge port of the valve, not
the regulator. See figure 6-1. Once the recharge is completed,
the recharge adaptor is removed from the discharge port of
the valve and the regulator is reinstalled.
CAUTION /
Do not attempt to recharge through the regulator.
Invert the tank after pressurizing to clear any air trapped in the
pickup tube. Using a soap solution, check for leaks. Reinstall to
piping network.
NOTE
The pressure gauge attached to the tank valve (or, if part of
the system, the PAC100) should not be used to determine
when the charging pressure has been reached. A pressure
regulator and separate, calibrated test pressure gauge must be
used.
Check the agent cylinder (and, if part of the system, the
PAC100) for corrosion, excessive pitting, structural damage,
fire damage, or repairs by soldering, welding, or brazing. If
any such damage or repairs are found, hydrostatically test the
equipment to the factory marked pressure, per NFPA-17A 5-5
Verify that the wet chemical cylinder (and, if part of the
system, the PAC100) are pressurized as intended.
RECHARGE
ADAPTOR (P/N
)NNECT
Figure 6-1: Recharge Adaptor & Quick Connect
Replace all fusible links by following the instructions listed in
the Installation Section.
Reset control head(s), accessories, pull stations and gas va1ve3
by following the instructions listed in the Installation Section.
Reconnect the control head, reinstall the carbon dioxide pilot
cartridge, and replace the control head cover. Replace the
tamper seal on the remote manual pull.
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 Page rev. C 72 Part# 10053
COMPONENTS LIST
S PART No.. DESCRIPTION
L1600 1.6 Gallon Cylinder
L3000 3.0 Gallon Cylinder Assembly
14600 4.6 Gallon Cylinder Assembly
L6000 6.o Gallon Cylinder Assembly
PACIOO Pneumatic Actuating Cylinder
MBI Mounting Bracket (For L6coo)
MBI5 Mounting Bracket
(For Li 600, L3000 & L4600)
MBP2 Mounting Bracket
(For MCHz)
MCH2 Mechanical Control Head
ENMCU2 Enclosure (For Primary Cylinder)
ENS Enclosure (For Secondary Cylinder
NLIH Wet Nozzle
NLIL Wet Nozzle
NL2H Wet Nozzle
NLZL Wet Nozzle
NLZD Wet Nozzle
423572 Swivel Adaptor
RPSM Remote Mechanical Pull Station
2105H Link Housing Kit
FLH25 Fusible Link Hanger
3231 Fusible Link 1650F "ML"
3232 Fusible Link ziaF "ML"
3233 Fusible Link 286F "ML"
3234 Fusible Link 36o°F "ML"
3235 Fusible Link 456°F "ML"
3236 Fusible Link oo°F "ML"
8075 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 3/4"
8100 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve i'
8125 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 1-1/4"
815o Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 1-1/2"
8200 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 2"
8250 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve z-x/z"
8300 Electric Gas Shut-Off Valve 3"
835 Reset Relay
PART No. DESCRIPTION
4C75H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve 3/4"
4100H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve i'
4125H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve 1-1/4"
4150H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve 1-1/2"
4200H Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve z'
4250 Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve a-i/a"
4300 Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve 3"
sspora Electrical Switch One Switch Assembly
MSDP1Yr2 Electrical Switch Two Switch Assembly
Ms3PDr: Electrical Switch Three Switch
Assembly
M24PrT2 Electrical Switch Four Switch Assembly
CO26 CO2 Cartridge
90KBS Corner Pulley - Compression
90SB Corner Pulley - Set Screw
1513 Tee Pulley - Compression
49002083 Wet Valve Cap Assembly
354207:.5 Conical Spring (Wet Valve)
551236 Pressure Gauge (Wet Valve)
s5og8c. Pressure Regulator Assembly
490420698 Wet Valve Rebuilding Kit
io6i Pressure Regulator Rebuild Kit
vi Valve Tool (Wet Valve)
35420716 Neck 0-Ring (Wet Valve)
49002:)7:9 Piston (Wet Valve)
35420715 Piston 0-Ring (Wet Valve)
3:5420714 Valve Cap 0-Ring (Wet Valve)
RLI6OJ 1.6 Gallon Recharge
RL300D 3.0 Gallon Recharge
L3000r 3.0 GallonTest Tank
146001' 4.6 Gallon Test Tank
L6000T 6.o GallonTest Tank
30542 D23 Wet Nozzle Cap (io Per Package)
305423726 Wet Nozzle Strainer (io Per Package)
305420725 Wet Nozzle 0-Ring (io Per Package)
305020028 Valve Stem 0-Ring
551175 Complete Wet Valve Assembly
551240 Recharge Adaptor
551039 Measuring Stick
310S Crimps (ioo Per Package)
79656 Flushing Solution (32-Oz.)
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005
Page rev. C
73 Part# 10053
NOTES:
I
S
Page rev. C
UL EX4521 December 13, 2005 74 Part # 10053
'T exil STAURANT
FIRE SUPPRESSION
SYSTEM
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
ProTex II Wet Chemical Solution
I Product Code: 1070-2-004 ANa Issue Date: 04-02-2012 I
Product and Company Identification
Material name ProTex II Wet Chemical Solution
Version# 01
Revision date 07-16-2010
CAS# Mixture
Product Code 1070-2-004 ANa
Product use Fire extinguishing agent
Manufacturer I Importer I
Supplier
Name Heiser Logistics, Inc.
Address 35 North Street• Suite 50
Canandaigua, NY 14424
Phone 585-394-8692
Internet http://www.heiserusa.com
Emergency Phone Number 8002553924
Hazards Identification
Emergency overview DANGER
Corrosive. Causes skin and eye burns.
OSHA regulatory status This product is considered hazardous under 29 CFR 1910.1200 (Hazard Communication).
Potential health effects
Routes of exposure Eye contact. Skin contact. Inhalation. Ingestion.
Eyes Do not get this material in contact with eyes. Corrosive to the eyes and may cause severe
damage including blindness.
Skin Harmful if absorbed through skin. Causes chemical burns. Do not get this material in contact with
skin.
Inhalation None known.
Ingestion Harmful if swallowed. Do not ingest.
Composition I Information on Ingredients
Components CAS # Percent
Potassium carbonate 584-08-7 40 -60
Other components below reportaole levels 40 -60
First Aid Measures
First aid procedures
Eye contact Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water 0r at least 15 minutes. Remove contact lenses, if
present and easy to do. Continue rinsing. Get medical attention if irritation persists after washing.
Skin contact Wash off with warm water and soap. Get medical attention if i:ritation develops and persists.
Inhalation Move to fresh air. For breathing difficulties, oxygen may be necessary. Get medical attention, if
needed.
Ingestion Rinse mouth. Do not induce vomiting without advice from poison control center. IF SWALLOWED:
• Immediately call a POISON CENTER or doctor/physician. If vomiting occurs, keep head low so
that stomach content doesn't get into the lungs.
Notes to physician Symptoms may be delayed.
General advice If you feel unwell, seek medical advice (show the label where possible). Ensure that medical
personnel are aware of the material(s) involved, and take precautions to protect themselves.
Show this safety data sheet to the doctor in attendance.
Material name: ProTex II Wet Chemical Solution MSDS US
1496 Version #01 Revision Date: 04-02-2012 1/4
Fire Fighting Measures
Flammable properties No unusual fire or explosion hazards noted.
Extinguishing media
Suitable extinguishing This product is not flammable. Use extinguishing agent suitable for type of surrounding fire.
media re
Protection of firefighters
Specific hazards arising None known.
from the chemical
Specific methods None known.
Hazardous combustion None known.
products
Accidental Release Measures
Personal precautions Keep unnecessary personnel away. Local authorities should be advised if significant spillages
cannot be contained. Surfaces may become slippery after spillage. Keep upwind.
Environmental precautions Prevent further leakage or spillage if safe to do so. Avoid discharge into drains, water courses or
onto the ground.
Methods for containment Stop the flow of material, if this is without risk. Dike the spilled material, where this is possible.
Prevent entry into waterways, sewer, basements or confined areas.
Methods for cleaning up Should not be released into the environment.
Large Spills: Dike far ahead of spill for later disposal. Use a non-combustible material like
vermiculite, sand or earth to soak up the product and place into a container for later disposal.
Small Spills: Wipe up with absorbent material (e.g. cloth, fleece).
Never return spills in original containers for re-use. Following product recovery, flush area with
water. Clean surface thoroughly to remove residual contamination.
Handling and Storage
Handling Do not get this material in contact with eyes. Avoid contact with skin. Avoid prolonged exposure.
Handle and open container with care.
Storage Store in cool place. Store in a well-ventilated place. Keep container tightly closed. Keep out of the
reach of children. Use care in handling/storage.
Exposure Controls I Personal Protection
Engineering controls Ensure adequate ventilation, especially in confined areas.
Personal protective equipment
Eye I face protection Avoid contact with eyes. Chemical goggles are recommended.
Skin protection Avoid contact with the skin. Wear suitable protective clothing.
Respiratory protection No personal respiratory protective equipment normally required.
General hygiene Avoid contact with eyes. Avoid contact with skin. Wash hands before breaks and immediately
considerations after handling the product.
Physical & Chemical Properties
Appearance
Form Liquid.
Color Clear. Colorless.
Odor Odorless.
Physical state Liquid.
pH 11-13
Melting point Not available.
Freezing point Not available.
Boiling point 230°F (110°C)
Flash point Not available.
Evaporation rate Not available.
Material name: ProTex II Wet Chemical Solution MSDS US
1496 Version # 01 Revision Date: 04-02-2012 2/4
Flammability limits in air, upper, Not available.
% by volume
Flammability limits in air, lower, Not available.
% by volume
Vapor pressure Not available.
Vapor density Not available.
Specific gravity 1.4
Relative density Not available.
Solubility (water) Not available.
Partition coefficient Not available
(n-octanol/water)
Auto-ignition temperature Not available.
Decomposition temperature Not available.
VOC Not available.
10. Chemical Stability & Reactivity Information
Chemical stability Material is stable under normal coicitions.
Conditions to avoid None known.
Incompatible materials Strong acids. Alkaline metals.
Hazardous decomposition None known.
products
Toxicological Information
Toxicological information The toxicity of this product has not been tested.
Toxicological data
Components Test Results
S Potassium carbonate (584-08-7) Acute Oral LD50 Mouse: 2570 mg/kg
Acute Oral LD50 Rat: 180 img/kg
Local effects Irritating to eyes. Irritating to skin.
Carcinogenicity This product is not considered to be a carcinogen by IARC, ACGIH, NTP, or OSHA.
Ecological Information
Environmental effects An environmental hazard cannot be excluded in the event of unprofessional handling or disposal.
Persistence and degradability Not available.
Disposal Considerations
Disposal instructions This product, in its present state, when discarded or disposed of, is not a hazardous waste
according to Federal regulations (40 CFR 261.4 (b)(4)). Under RCRA, it is the responsibility of
the user of the product to determine, at the time of disposal, whether the product meets RCRA
criteria for hazardous waste. Dispose of waste material according to Local, State, Federal, and
Provincial Environmental Regulations.
Waste from residues I unused Dispose of in accordance with local regulations.
products
Transport Information
DOT
Not regulated as dangerous goods.
Regulatory Information
US federal regulations This product is a "Hazardous Chemical" as defined by the OSHA Hazard Communication
Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200. S All components are on the U.S. EPA TSCA Inventory List.
CERCLA/SARA Hazardous Substances - Not applicable.
Material name: ProTex II Wet Chemical Solution MSOS US
1496 Version #01 Revision Date: 04-02-2012 /
CERCLA (Superfund) reportable quantity
None
Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 (SARA)
Hazard categories Acute Health - Yes
Chronic Health - No
Fire Hazard - No
Pressure Hazard - No
Reactivity Hazard - No
Section 302 extremely No
hazardous substance
Section 311 hazardous No
chemical
Inventory status
Country(s) or region Inventory name On inventory (yes/no)*
Australia Australian Inventory of Chemical Sul: stances (AICS) Yes
Canada Domestic Substances List (DSL) Yes
Canada Non-Domestic Substances List (NDSL) No
China Inventory of Existing Chemical Substances in China (IECSC) Yes
Europe European Inventory of Existing Commercial Chemical Yes
Substances (EINECS)
Europe European List of Notified Chemical Substances (ELINCS) No
Japan Inventory of Existing and New Chemical Substances (ENCS) Yes
Korea Existing Chemicals List (ECL) Yes
New Zealand New Zealand Inventory Yes
Philippines Philippine Inventory of Chemicals and Chemical Substances Yes
(PICCS)
United States & Puerto Rico Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) Inventory Yes
*A "Yes" indicates that all components of this product comply with the inventcry rEquirements administered by the governing country(s)
State regulations This product does not contain a chemical known to the State of Ca ifornia to cause cancer, birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
16. Other Information
Further information HMIS® is a registered trade and service mark of the NPCA.
HMIS® ratings Health: 2
Flammability: 0
Physical hazard: 0
NFPA ratings Health: 2
Flammability: 0
Instability: 0
Disclaimer The information provided in this Safety Data Sheet is correct to the best of our knowledge,
information and belief at the date of its publication. The information given is designed only as a
guidance for safe handling, use, processing, storage, transportation, disposal and release and is
not to be considered a warranty or quality specification. The information relates only to the
specific material designated and may not be valid for such material used in combination with any
other materials or in any process, unless specified in the text.
Issue date 07-16-2010
S
Material name: ProTex II Wet Chemical Solution MSDS US
1496 Version #01 Revision Date: 04-02-2012 /
S
General
ll,
Tex
STAURANT
FIRE SUPPRESSION
SYSTEM
Engineer and Architect Specifications
He ise r
LOGISTICS
Features
UL and ULC Approved
Complies with NFPA Standard
I7A and 96
Meets the requirements of the
Building Officials and Code
Administrators
Approved by the City of New
York Material and Equipment
Acceptance Division.
TO REMOTE
MANUAL
PULL
STATION
TO
TO GAS VALVE
FUSIBLE SHUTOFF
LINKS Jk
TO ..,PrOTexlt
ADDITI )NAL >
CYLINDERS
28.125" OPTIONAL
ELECTRICAL
SWITCH ProTeus CONNECTION
13.125" I- 10.625"
FRONT SIDE
Flow Mounting
Point Bracket
Model No. A B C D Capacity Weight Used
L1600 7.00 , t9.62125.371 17.31 1 5 1 33 lbs. I MB15
13000 8.00 2506 30.81 22.75 10 1 53 lbs. MB15
L4600 10.00 25,416 30.81 22.75 15 83 lbs. MB15
L6000 il).'OVI 3581 41.56 3330 20 1 108 lbs. MB1
All dimensions are n inches
SuggestedArchitect's Specifications
THE PROTEX II Restaurant Fire Suppression System is a re-
engineered solution to appliance and ventilatng hood and duct grease
fires. The system is designed to maximize ha srd protection, reliability,
and installation efficiency. Automatic or maotal system a:ivation
releases a throttle discharge of potassium caronate solut:cn on the
protected area in the form of fine droplets to suppress the fire and help
prevent reignition after the discharge is complete.
System Operation
THE PROTEX II Restaurant Kitchen Fire Suçpression System has been
designed for protecting kitchen hood, plenum, exhaust duct, grease
filters, and cooking appliances (such as fryers, griddles, rangetops,
upright broilers, charbroilers and woks) from grease fires. The versatile
state-of-the-art wet chemical distribution technique, combined with
dual, independent activation capability - automatic fusible link or
manual release - provides efficient, reliable protection the moment
a fire is detected. Once initiated, the pressuzed wet chemical
extinguishing agent cylinder discharges a potassium carbonate
solution through a pre-engineered piping nework and out the
discharge nozzles. The wet chemical discha.e pattern is maintained
The fire suppression system should be of the stored pressure, wet
chemical pre-engineered fixed nozzle type manufactured by Protex.
A 16-gram CO2 cartridge is designed in compliance with Military
Specification "MIL-C-601G," and shall be used as the pneumatic
releasing device for the system. The cartridge shall be an integral part
of the mechanical control head. The wet chemical cylinder shall be
DoT-rated for stored pressure of 225 psig, and a pressure gauge shall
be provided on the cylinder valve assembly for visual inspection. The
system shall be capable of automatic and manual actuation. Automatic
actuation shall be provided by an appropriate number of fusible link
detectors mounted in series on a stainless steel cable input line to the
mechanical control head. Manual actuation is provided by a remote
mechanical pull station with a dedicated cable line to the mechanical
control head.
The system shall have been tested to the UL Standardfor Fire
Extinguishing Systems for Protection of Restaurant Cooking Area, U L3 00,
and Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. It shall be installed in
accordance with the National Fire Protection Association Standard
No. I7A Wet Chemical Extinguisher Systems, and No. 96 Standardfor
the Installation of Equipmentfor the Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden
Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment, and comply with all local
and/or state codes and standards.
Refer to ProTex II Restaurant Fire Suppression System Manual, P/N
PMAN2, for detailed installation and maintenance instructions.
Sfor a duration of time to ensure suppression and inhibit reignition.
Expanded capability provides remote manual actuation, gas equipment
shutdown, and electrical system shutdown. This optional equipment
will enhance the basic system functions anc be applicable when
designing custom configurations to suit a pa::i:ular customer's needs
and/or comply with local codes.
Typical Installation
I. Mechanical Control Head— Integral design requires no separate
release pressure cylinder; separate stainless steel cable activation lines
for automatic fusible link and optional remote mechanical puL station
provide an added measure of safety; an easily accessible manual release
mechanism which provides an option to the automatic fusible link and,
depending on local codes, can be used in place of a remote manual
pull station; unique fool proof technique for achieving necessary input
stainless steel cable tension.
PIPING - Unbalanced piping network simplifies application design
and installation; no separate piping to connect system pressure cylinders
to extinguishing agent container. Schedule 40 stainless, chrome-plated
and black pipe can be used.
CYLINDERS (DoT-4B-225 RATED) - Contain Protex Potassium
Carbonate Solution stored at 125 psig; pressure gauge for visual
maintenance checks; 1.6, 3.0, 4.6, and 6.o gallon sizes provide 5, 10,
i, and zo flow point coverage respectively, offering a broad range of
application coverage.
NOZZLES - Can be fixed or fitted with a swivel adaptor allowing the
nozzle to be rotated approximately 30 0 in all directions.
. REMOTE MECHANICAL PULL STATION - Simple operating
instructions with a double action reease avoids careless system
discharge; a iso' stainless steel cable line with 1/16° cable and 40
corner pulleys maximum; a dedicated stainless steel cable line to the
mechanical control head provides a true back-up in the event fusible
links are fouled.
FUSIBLE LINK EQUIPMENT - Accommodates both series and
terminal placement to minimize inventory and simplify ordering; all
necessary components included for efficient assembly and installation.
Fusible links rated for maximum ambient temperature must be ordered
separately. Maximum limitations of zo fusible Lnks on a 150' stainless
steel cable line with 40 corner pulleys provide substantial hazard
coverage.
GAS VALVE - Complies with requirements pertaining to the shut-off
of fuel as described by N F 'A I7A; after regular maintenance/service
check can be reset at mechanical control head for convenience of
service technician; a ioo' stainless steel cable line with 30 corner pulleys
maximum provides mounting flexibility.
CORNER PULLEYS AND ACCESSORIES - Designed to ensure reliable
system function, as tested by Underwriters Laboratories.
Quantity Flows per (Qty x Flow)
Nozzle Required Nozzle Total Flows
9.
TOTAL FLOW POINTS
CYLINDER(S) REQUIRED
Left to Right
Griddle: 42" )( 30"
Range: 28" x 28"
Fryer: 16" x 16"
Fryer: 16" x 16"
Gas Radiant Charbroiler: 26" x 24"
Wok: 25" Diameter
Hood: 14' x 4'
Duct: 30" x 12"
Clearance above appliances: 40"
Sheet I
Nozzle
Quantity Flows per (Qty x Flow)
Required Nozzle Total Flows
TOTAL FLOW POINTS
CYLINDER(S) REQUIRED
Left to Right
Range: 12" x 28"
Griddle: 30" x 30"
Fryer: 16" x 16"
Upright Broiler with Drip Pan: 30" x 34"
Wok: 28" Diameter
Hood: 10' x 4'
Duct: 16" x 16"
Clearance above appliances: 42"
Sheet 2
0 0 0
R F V I S E D
fl
Fryer
Multiple Nozzle Protection
Important: Page 3-10 (1st paragraph) - Highlight.
Each module must not exceed the maximum area allowed for a single nozzle.,
However, when using multiple nozzle protection, the longest side allowed for a fryer
with drip board can be used, regardless .f whether the fryer has a drip board or not.
The maximum size fryer that can be m:jdularized is 864 sq. in.
Two sets of numbers you are going to work with when moëularizing a fryer.
Reference page 3-3, "Fryers with drip hoards."
Write these sets of numbers at the top of your board.
324 sq. in.; 27/4" longest side; maximum area with drip— 500 sq. in.
371 sq. in.; 25/s" longest side; maximum area with drip-45 sq. in.
0
4 26"
t
10.66" 0
10.66"
*-------------
0
1O.6
t -------------
0
4 26"
Old method would require
4 nozzles
0:0
Or you could just equally
divide the three sections into
10.66" each I
32"
I
324 sq. in.; 27%" longest side; maximum area with drip— 500 sq. in.
S 371 sq. in.; 253,"W" longest side; maximum area with drip— 495 sq. in.
EXAMPLE #1
14 26"
I
32"
No
drip board
I
26 x 32 = 832 sq. in.
832 = 2.56 nozzles
324 longest side: 271/4"
832 = 2.24 nozzles
371 longest side: 253/8"
Use #1 because it meets the
longest side.
S
Start from the back of the vat,
and figure the opposite side
324 = 1246"
26'
4 26"
12.46"
12.46"
I
7.08"
V
I
32"
I
EXAMPLE #2
324 sq. in.; 273/4" longest side; maximum area with drip— 500 sq. in.
371 sq. in.; 253/8" longest side; maximum area with drip— 495 sq. in. S
24"
t
30" vat
(36"
overall)
I
6" drip
4,
24 x 30 = 720 sq. in.
720 = 2.22 nozzles
324 longest side: 271/4" (w/drip 500 sq. in.)
720 = 1.9 nozzles
371 longest side: 251/8" (w/drip 495 sq. in.)
Use #2 because it meets the longest side and requires
fewer nozzles..
24"
S Again, start from the back of the vat to figure opposite side.
371 sq. in. = 15.45 sq. in.
15.45" 24
24x 15.45 =370.8 sq. in.
24 x 14.55 = 349.2 sq. in.
Now you need to include the drip board
14.55" 14.55" + 6" = 20.55"
24 x 20.55 = 493.2 sq. in.
This does not exceed allowable sq. in. of 495
(included in our set of numbers)
2 nozzles would cover this fryer.
36"
w/drip
Old method would require
4 nozzles
t
30" vat
(36"
overall)
I
[ø1
6" drip
4,
I
24"
S
324 sq. in.; 273/4" longest side; maximum area with drip— 590 sq. in.
S 3'l sq. in.; 2531J' longest side; maximum area with drip— 495 sq. in.
EXAMPLE #3
* 10"
This fryer could be a small donut fryer with a chain running through it.
10x27.5=270 sq. in.
Longest sid..= is okay and sq. in. is okay.
55??
overall
(no drip)
S
[1